July 2003

P/N 76-100016-001

PEGAsys™
Intelligent Suppression Control
and Fire Alarm System

Installation,
Operation and
Maintenance Manual
R
FM
LISTED APPROVED
UL Listing File No. S2422 Factory Mutual Approval J.I. No. OB2A6.AY
July 2003
P/N 76-100016-001

PEGAsys™
Intelligent Suppression Control
and Fire Alarm System

Installation,
Operation and
Maintenance Manual
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
 FOREWORD

Note: This Manual Is To Be Used By Trained Distributors Only

This manual is intended to clearly and accurately reflect the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System.
This publication describes the operation, installation and maintenance of the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression
Control System, P/Ns 76-100000-501 for Single-Loop System and 76-100000-600 for Multi-Loop System.

TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

AC Alternating Current NCCM Networkable Central Control Module

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act NIC Network Interface Card
AH Ampre Hour NFPA National Fire Protection Agency
AI Addressable Contact Input Device NO Normally Open
AO Addressable Relay Output Device NR Not Registered
AST Alarm Simulation Test NYC New York City
ATM Annunciator Terminal Module P/N Part Number
BIP Broadcast Indexed Protocol PALM PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module
BPM Beats Per Minute PAS Positive Alarm Sequence
CCM Central Control Module PC Personal Computer
CCP Central Control Panel PCB Printed Circuit Board
DC Direct Current PCS PEGAsys Configuration Software
EDP Electronic Data Processing PC Line Power/Communication Line (RX/TX Loop)
EOC Event Output Control PS Power Supply
ESD Electrostatic Discharge RCU Remote Control Unit
FCP Fire Control Panel RDCM Remote Display Control Module
GUI Graphical User Interface RDM Remote Display Module
HSSD High-Sensitivity Smoke Detector RTC Real-Time Clock
HVAC Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning RX/TX Receive Transmit
I/O Input/Output SL Single-Loop
ID Identification SLC Signaling Line Circuit
IRI Industrial Risk Insurers SPDT Single Pole, Double Throw
LCD Liquid Crystal Display UL Underwriter Laboratories
LED Light Emitting Diode V Volts
ML Multi-Loop Vac Voltage Alternating Current
NC Normally Closed Vdc Voltage Direct Current

i
ACCEPTANCES, APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS
PEGAsys Single-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-501)
• UL: Underwriters Laboratories Listing File Number S2422.
• FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511
• CSFM: California State Fire Marshal Listing Number 7165-1076:146.
• NYC: City of New York Listing Number MEA 454-91-E Vol.III.
PEGAsys Multi-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-600)
• UL: Underwriter’s Laboratories Listing File Number S2422.
• FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511
• CSFM: California State Fire Marshal Listing Number 7165-1076:146.
• NYC: City of New York Listing Number MEA 454-91-E Vol.III.

ii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foreword ................................................................................................................................... i
Terms and Abbreviations ........................................................................................................... i
Appendices ................................................................................................................................ vii
List of Illustrations ...................................................................................................................... viii
List of Tables ............................................................................................................................. x
Safety Summary ........................................................................................................................ xi

PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

1 General Information ................................................................................................................ 1-1

1-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1-1.1 System Description .................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1.2 System Components ................................................................................................................. 1-1
1-2 Component Description ............................................................................................................. 1-2
1-2.1 Central Control Module (CCM) .................................................................................................. 1-2
1-2.2 Display Module .......................................................................................................................... 1-2
1-2.3 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ...................................................................................... 1-2
1-2.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 1-2
1-2.5 Basic Motherboard .................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2.6 Multi-Loop Motherboard ............................................................................................................ 1-3
1-2.7 Output Modules ......................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2.7.1 Signal Output Module ................................................................................................................ 1-4
1-2.7.2 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 1-4
1-2.7.3 Agent Release Output Module ................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2.7.4 City-Tie Module .......................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2.8 Remote Display/Control Modules .............................................................................................. 1-5
1-2.9 ATM Series Driver Modules ....................................................................................................... 1-5
1-2.10 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 1-5
1-2.11 Standby Batteries ....................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2.12 Intelligent Loop Devices ............................................................................................................ 1-6
1-2.12.1 SmartOne Ionization Detector ................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2.12.2 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector .............................................................................................. 1-6
1-2.12.3 SmartOne Heat Detector ........................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2.13 SmartOne Detector Bases ........................................................................................................ 1-6
1-2.14 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 1-6
1-2.15 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 1-7
1-2.16 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing .............................................................................................. 1-7
1-2.17 Loop Isolator Devices ................................................................................................................ 1-7
1-2.18 ORION XT Interface Module ..................................................................................................... 1-7
1-2.19 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 1-8
1-2.20 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 1-8
1-3 System Specification ................................................................................................................. 1-8

2 Operation ................................................................................................................................. 2-1

2-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2-1.1 Modes of Operation ................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-2 Controls and Indicators .............................................................................................................. 2-1
2-2.1 LCD Display ............................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-2.2 Audible Device ........................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-3 System Security ......................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-3.1 Levels of Security ...................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-3.2 Default Passwords ..................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-3.3 Entering Passwords ................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-4 System Power-Up ...................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-5 System Menus ........................................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.1 Menu Structure .......................................................................................................................... 2-4

iii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)
PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

2-5.2 Accessing the System Menus ................................................................................................... 2-4

2-5.3 Exiting the System Menus ......................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.4 Menu Functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.4.1 Isolate Menu Function ............................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.4.2 List Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-5.4.3 Set Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-5.4.4 Test Menu Function ................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-6 Modes of Operation ................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-6.1 Normal Standby Mode ............................................................................................................... 2-7
2-6.2 Active Alarm Mode ..................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-6.2.1 Alarm Mode Indications ............................................................................................................. 2-7
2-6.2.2 Alarm Mode User Action ............................................................................................................ 2-7
2-6.3 Active Supervisory Mode ........................................................................................................... 2-10
2-6.3.1 Supervisory Mode Indication ..................................................................................................... 2-10
2-6.3.2 Supervisory Mode User Action .................................................................................................. 2-11
2-6.4 Active Trouble Mode .................................................................................................................. 2-11
2-6.4.1 Trouble Mode Indications .......................................................................................................... 2-11
2-6.4.2 Trouble Mode User Action ......................................................................................................... 2-11
2-7 Printing Operation ...................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8 System Programming ................................................................................................................ 2-12
2-8.1 EOC Programming .................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.1.1 Listing EOC Programming ......................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.2 RTC Programming .................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.2.1 Listing RTC Programming ......................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.2.2 Enable/Disable RTC Program Line Numbers ............................................................................ 2-13
2-8.3 Types of Inputs and Outputs ...................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.3.1 System Inputs ............................................................................................................................ 2-13
2-8.3.2 Remote Control Unit (RCU) ....................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.3.3 RX/TX Loops ............................................................................................................................. 2-13
2-8.3.4 System Outputs ......................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.3.5 System Output Modules ............................................................................................................ 2-13
2-8.4 Addressing Output Modules ...................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.5 Registering Output Module Assignments ................................................................................... 2-14
2-8.5.1 Listing Output Module Assignment ............................................................................................ 2-14
2-8.6 Addressing RCUs ...................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-8.7 Registering RCUs ...................................................................................................................... 2-15
2-8.7.1 Detector Registration ................................................................................................................. 2-15
2-8.7.2 Addressable Monitor Module Registration ................................................................................. 2-15
2-8.7.3 Remote Control Module Registration ......................................................................................... 2-16
2-8.7.4 Listing all Registered RCUs ....................................................................................................... 2-16
2-8.7.5 De-Registering RCUs ................................................................................................................ 2-16

3 Functional Description ............................................................................................................ 3-1

3-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3-2 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-3 Functional Descriptions ............................................................................................................. 3-2
3-3.1 Central Control Module .............................................................................................................. 3-2
3-3.2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ...................................................................................... 3-3
3-3.3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 3-4
3-3.4 Multi-Loop Motherboard ............................................................................................................ 3-5
3-3.5 Signal Output Module ................................................................................................................ 3-5
3-3.6 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 3-6
3-3.7 Agent Release Output Module ................................................................................................... 3-7
3-3.8 City-Tie Module .......................................................................................................................... 3-7
iv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)
PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

3-3.9 Remote Display Control Modules .............................................................................................. 3-8

3-3.10 ATM Series Driver Modules ....................................................................................................... 3-8
3-3.11 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 3-8
3-3.12 Field Devices ............................................................................................................................. 3-9
3-3.13 SmartOne Ionization Detector ................................................................................................... 3-9
3-3.14 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector .............................................................................................. 3-9
3-3.15 SmartOne Heat Detector ........................................................................................................... 3-9
3-3.16 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 3-9
3-3.17 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 3-10
3-3.18 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing .............................................................................................. 3-10
3-3.19 Loop Isolator Devices ................................................................................................................ 3-10
3-3.20 PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM) ............................................................................ 3-11
3-3.21 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 3-11
3-3.22 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 3-12

4 Maintenance Procedure .......................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4-2 Scheduled Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4-3 Maintenance Procedures ........................................................................................................... 4-1
4-3.1 Lamp Test .................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4-3.2 Loop Device Test ....................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-3.3 Battery Test ................................................................................................................................ 4-2
4-3.4 Walk Test ................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-3.4.1 Walk Testing Detectors .............................................................................................................. 4-2
4-3.4.2 Walk Test Procedure ................................................................................................................. 4-2
4-3.5 Alarm Simulation Test (AST) ..................................................................................................... 4-3
4-3.5.1 AST Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-4 Disarming and Rearming Release Circuits ................................................................................ 4-3
4-4.1 Disarming Release Circuits ....................................................................................................... 4-4
4-4.2 Arming Release Circuits ............................................................................................................ 4-4
4-5 Powering Down the System ....................................................................................................... 4-4
4-5.1 Power-Down Procedure ............................................................................................................ 4-4
4-6 Powering Up the System ........................................................................................................... 4-4
4-6.1 Power-Up Procedure ................................................................................................................. 4-4

5 Troubleshooting and Corrective Maintenance ..................................................................... 5-1

5-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5-2 Standard Fault-Isolation Techniques .......................................................................................... 5-1
5-2.1 Visual Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-2.2 Power Checks ........................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-3 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-4 Removal and Replacement ....................................................................................................... 5-2
5-4.1 Required Tools ........................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-4.2 Central Control Module .............................................................................................................. 5-2
5-4.3 RX/TX Module ........................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-4.4 Field Devices ............................................................................................................................. 5-3

6 Parts List .................................................................................................................................. 6-1

6-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 6-1

7 Installation ................................................................................................................................ 7-1

7-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7-2 Materials Required For Installation ............................................................................................ 7-1

v
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)
PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

7-3 Installation Procedure For Central Control Panel ...................................................................... 7-1

7-4 Installation Procedure For Expansion Enclosures ..................................................................... 7-1
7-5 Installation Procedure For Output Motherboard ........................................................................ 7-2
7-6 Installation Procedure For Rx/Tx Module (Multi-Loop Only) ...................................................... 7-2
7-7 Installation of Output Modules ................................................................................................... 7-3
7-7.1 Signal Audible Output Module ................................................................................................... 7-3
7-7.2 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 7-4
7-7.3 Agent Release Module .............................................................................................................. 7-4
7-7.4 City-Tie Output Module .............................................................................................................. 7-4
7-7.5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 7-4
7-7.6 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion Enclosure ........................................................... 7-4
7-7.7 Power Supply Communication Connections .............................................................................. 7-5
7-8 Connecting AC Power ............................................................................................................... 7-5
7-9 Install And Connect DC Power .................................................................................................. 7-6
7-9.1 Battery Enclosure ...................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-9.2 Batteries .................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-10 Field Device Connection To RX/TX Module ............................................................................... 7-6
7-10.1 Wiring the RX/TX PC Line ......................................................................................................... 7-6
7-11 Output Signal Connection .......................................................................................................... 7-8
7-12 External Power Failure Indicator Connection ............................................................................ 7-8
7-13 Detector Installation ................................................................................................................... 7-8
7-14 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivities ................................................... 7-8
7-14.1 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure .................................... 7-9
7-15 Addressable Contact Input Device Installation .......................................................................... 7-9
7-16 Addressable Relay Output Device Installation ........................................................................... 7-9
7-17 Installation Checkout ................................................................................................................. 7-10
7-18 Connection of Peripherals ......................................................................................................... 7-10
7-18.1 Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer ........................................................................... 7-10
7-18.2 Connecting a Printer .................................................................................................................. 7-10

vi
 LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX TITLE PAGE

A Power Supply Requirements ..................................................................................................... A-1

B System Expansion ..................................................................................................................... B-1
C Releasing Applications .............................................................................................................. C-1
D Reserved for Future Use ........................................................................................................... D-1
E Factory Mutual Sprinkler Requirements for Pre-Action and Deluge Type Sprinkler Systems .... E-1
F Glossary .................................................................................................................................... F-1
G Display Abbreviations ................................................................................................................ G-1
H Wiring Requirements for PEGAsys Signaling Line Circuit RX/TX ............................................. H-1
I System Drawings ....................................................................................................................... I-1
J PEGAsys Network Interface Card ............................................................................................. J-1
K Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ K-1
L Remote Display Control Module and Remote Display Module .................................................. L-1
M Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. M-1
N Networkable Central Control Module (NCCM) ........................................................................... N-1
O Central Station Operation .......................................................................................................... O-1

vii
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE TITLE PAGE

1-1 PEGAsys System, Overall Diagram .......................................................................................... 1-0

1-2 Central Control Module (CCM) .................................................................................................. 1-2
1-3 Display Module Assembly .......................................................................................................... 1-2
1-4 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ...................................................................................... 1-2
1-5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .............................................................................................. 1-3
1-6 Basic Motherboard .................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-7 Multi-Loop Motherboard ............................................................................................................ 1-3
1-8 Signal Output Module ................................................................................................................ 1-4
1-9 Relay Output Module ................................................................................................................. 1-4
1-10 Agent Release Output Module ................................................................................................... 1-4
1-11 City Tie Module .......................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-12 RDCM Keypad ........................................................................................................................... 1-5
1-13 Module Mounting Dimensions ................................................................................................... 1-5
1-14 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 1-5
1-15 Battery Enclosure ...................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-16 SmartOne Detection Device ...................................................................................................... 1-6
1-17 4-inch Detector Base ................................................................................................................. 1-6
1-18 6-inch Detector Base ................................................................................................................. 1-6
1-19 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 1-6
1-20 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 1-7
1-21 Air Duct Housing ........................................................................................................................ 1-7
1-22 Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone ......................................................................................................... 1-7
1-23 Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount ...................................................................................................... 1-7
1-24 Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount ................................................................................ 1-7
1-25 PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD ........................................................................... 1-7
1-26 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 1-8
1-27 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 1-8

2-1 System Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-2 Menu Structure .......................................................................................................................... 2-5
2-3 Active Alarms Example .............................................................................................................. 2-7
2-4 Supervisory Example for Supervisory Mode Indication ............................................................. 2-11
2-5 Active Troubles and Pre-Alarms Example ................................................................................. 2-11
2-6 Output Module Address Scheme ............................................................................................... 2-13
2-7 RCU Registration Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-15

3-1 Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System ............................................................................ 3-1

3-2 Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System ............................................................................... 3-1
3-3 Central Control Module, Details ................................................................................................. 3-2
3-4 Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details ........................................................................................ 3-3
3-5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly Details .................................................................................. 3-4
3-6 Multi-Loop Motherboard, Details ................................................................................................ 3-5
3-7 Signal Output Module, Details ................................................................................................... 3-6
3-8 Relay Output Module, Details .................................................................................................... 3-7
3-9 Agent Release Output Module, Details ...................................................................................... 3-7
3-10 City Tie Module, Details ............................................................................................................. 3-8
3-11 RDCM Keypad ........................................................................................................................... 3-8
3-12 ATM Module .............................................................................................................................. 3-8
3-13 Network Interface Card ............................................................................................................. 3-8
3-14 Typical Detector ......................................................................................................................... 3-9
3-15 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................ 3-10
3-16 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................. 3-10

viii
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont.)
FIGURE TITLE PAGE

3-17 DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ........................................................................................................ 3-10

3-18 Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount ...................................................................................................... 3-11
3-19 Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone ......................................................................................................... 3-11
3-20 Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount ................................................................................ 3-11
3-21 PALM Interface Module for ORION XT HSSD ........................................................................... 3-11
3-22 Addressable AlarmLine Module ................................................................................................. 3-11
3-23 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module ........................................................................................ 3-12

5-1 Single Loop Installation .............................................................................................................. 5-2

5-2 Multi-Loop Installation ................................................................................................................ 5-2

7-1 CCP Installation Drawing ........................................................................................................... 7-1

7-2 Back Plate, Output Motherboard and Four Power Supplies ...................................................... 7-2
7-3 Back Plate, Eight Power Supplies ............................................................................................. 7-2
7-4 Back Plate, Two Output Motherboards ...................................................................................... 7-2
7-5 Installation for Multi-Loop .......................................................................................................... 7-3
7-6 Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 7-4
7-7 Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure ............................................ 7-5
7-8 RS-485 Connection ................................................................................................................... 7-5
7-9 Battery Enclosure ...................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-10 Conduit to CCP .......................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-11 Shielded Wire to CCP ............................................................................................................... 7-7
7-12 Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections ......................................................................................... 7-7
7-13 Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections ......................................................................................... 7-7
7-14 Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with Loop Isolators .......................................................... 7-8
7-15 Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection .......................................................................................... 7-8
7-16 CCM Printer Port ....................................................................................................................... 7-10

ix
 LIST OF TABLES
TABLE TITLE PAGE

1-1 System Specifications ................................................................................................................ 1-8

2-1 Controls and Indicators .............................................................................................................. 2-2

2-2 Isolate Menu Function ............................................................................................................... 2-8
2-3 List Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-8
2-4 Set Menu Function .................................................................................................................... 2-9
2-5 Test Menu Functions ................................................................................................................. 2-10

3-1 Multi-Loop Motherboard Connectors ......................................................................................... 3-5

3-2 Approved Release Output Devices ............................................................................................ 3-7

5-1 Troubleshooting Index ............................................................................................................... 5-1

5-2 RX/TX Configuration Selection .................................................................................................. 5-3

6-1 PEGAsys System Parts List ...................................................................................................... 6-1

7-1 RX/TX Configuration Selection .................................................................................................. 7-3

7-2 Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly ................. 7-5

x
 SAFETY SUMMARY

Note: Installation Precautions– Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability.

! WARNING
Several different sources of power can be connected to this fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all
sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing
and/or inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to
install, service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood.

! CAUTION
System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product
must be tested in accordance with NFPA-72 (2002) Chapter 10 after any programming operation or change
in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system
components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change
must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least
10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices,
must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0° to 49° C and at a relative humidity of 85% (non-
condensing) @ 30°C. However, the useful life of the system’s standby batteries and the electronic
components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature and humidity variations. Therefore, it is
recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room
temperature of 60° to 80°F.
Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when
subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning
transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. The use of overhead or outside
aerial wiring is not recommended due to the increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult
with the Applications Engineering Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered.
Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can
damage circuits.
Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure.
When possible, make all cable entries from the sides. Before making modifications, verify that they will
not interfere with battery and printed circuit board location.
Do not over tighten screw terminals. Over tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal
contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal.
This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap
before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static suppressive
packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the control unit.
Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. These instructions must
be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. System operation and
reliability depend upon proper installation.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Note: While installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insur-
ance!
An automatic fire alarm system—typically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible
warning devices, and a fire alarm control unit with remote notification capability—can provide early warning of a develop-
ing fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire.

xi
Any fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons:
Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or
on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A
second floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Furthermore, all types of smoke detec-
tors—both ionization and photoelectric types—have sensing limitations. No type of smoke detector can sense every kind
of fire caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper stor-
age of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches or arson.
Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or
partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building.
A fire alarm system will not operate without electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby
batteries only for a specified time.
Rate-of-rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of
each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist.
Auxiliary equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control panel. It is essential to use only
equipment listed for service with your control panel.
Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or
temporarily disabled.
The most common cause of fire alarm malfunctions, however, is inadequate maintenance. All devices and system wiring
should be tested and maintained by professional fire alarm installers following written procedures supplied with each
device. System inspection and testing should be scheduled monthly or as required by national and/or local fire codes.
Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept.

GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES

Note: The following must be observed to maintain personnel safety.
The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing in the manual. The safety
precautions in this section must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance. This manual is to be used
by trained distributors/technicians. The entire manual should be read and fully understood prior to installation.
TEST EQUIPMENT
Make certain test equipment is in good operating condition. Do not touch live equipment or personnel working on live
equipment while holding a test meter. Some types of measuring devices should not be grounded; these devices should
not be held when taking measurements.
FIRST AID
Any injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The following general safety precautions are to be observed at all times:
1. All electrical components associated with equipment shall be installed and grounded in accordance with NEC, NFPA
and local regulatory requirements.
2. Special precautionary measures are essential to prevent applying power to equipment at any time maintenance work
is in progress.
3. Before working on electrical equipment, use a voltmeter to ensure that the system is not energized.
4. When working near electricity, do not use metal rulers, flashlights, metallic pencils or any other objects having ex-
posed conductive material.
5. When connecting a meter to terminals for measurement, use voltage range higher than the expected voltage.

xii
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
January 2002
PEGAsys™

FIRE FIRE Alarm Notification

ALARM ALARM
Appliances
PUSH

1-0
PULL

RS-485

PUSH / HOLD

SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT

Addressable Suppression
System Abort Device

76-100016-001
Figure 1-1. PEGAsys System, Overall Diagram

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains the operation, maintenance, trouble-
shooting, parts listing and installation information neces-
sary to support the PEGAsys™ Intelligent Suppression
Control and Fire Alarm System.
Note: This manual is to be used by trained distributors
only. The entire manual should be read and fully
understood prior to installation. Refer to Figure 1-
1 for the PEGAsys System overall diagram.
1-1.1 System Description
PEGAsys is a fire alarm/suppression control system which
can be used for local, auxiliary, remote protective signal-
ing and releasing device service. The system is a micro-
processor based design for use with intelligent detectors
and loop devices.
The system utilizes distributed intelligent field devices.
These devices are typically smoke detectors, contact in-
put devices, relay outputs and signal output modules which
represent a single fire alarm initiation/indicating zone. Each
device contains its own data transceiver, micro controller,
4K of memory and applicable algorithms which allows each
device to operate independently of the control system.
These unique devices have the ability to analyze informa-
tion, make decisions and store information within them-
selves. They communicate with the PEGAsys system using
the BIP protocol which utilizes a two-wire (Style 4), four
wire (Style 6) or isolated (Style 7) multiplex trunk. The
PEGAsys can support up to 255 device addresses per loop,
with a maximum of eight (8) loops, for a total of 2,040 in-
telligent device points per system.
The PEGAsys is capable of controlling a wide variety of
auxiliary devices, such as relays, audible/visual indicating
signal devices and agent/sprinkler release systems. The
system also supports the use of serial printers which pro-
vide hard copy of system status information.
There are three versions of the PEGAsys currently in ser-
vice. These three versions are identified as:
• Pre-Network,
• Networkable, and
• Networkable and directly-integrable with ORION™
XT High-Sensitivity Smoke Detectors (HSSDs).
Pre-networked systems have operating firmware in the
Central Control Module (CCM) that ranged from Version
48.0 to Version 6X.X. All pre-networked systems must now
76-100016-001
PEGAsys™
have Version 60.0, or higher, operating firmware. Pre-net-
worked systems are not covered in this manual.
Networkable systems have a modified CCM that can ac-
cept a Network Interface Card (NIC) for peer-to-peer con-
trol unit operations, and can accommodate Remote Display
Modules (RDMs), Remote Display Control Modules
(RDCMs) and ATM Series Driver Modules (ATM-L/R).
Networkable systems have CCM Version 7X.X firmware.
Networkable systems that are directly-integrable with
ORION XT HSSDs have Version 8X.X CCM firmware.
1-1.2 System Components
The system is comprised of three major components, as
shown in Figure 1-1: the Central Control Panel (CCP) which
communicates with the field devices and drives output
devices such as alarm signals that communicate with cen-
tral stations and various types of control equipment; a dis-
play panel located on the CCP that provides system status
LEDs and Control Switches; and an 80-character LCD that
provides alphanumeric display of system status informa-
tion.
The single-loop PEGAsys Central Control Panel (P/N
76-100000-501) consists of the Central Control Module
(CCM) assembly, one receiver/transmitter (RX/TX) mod-
ule and one power supply assembly. Optionally the sys-
tem can add a motherboard assembly which allows for the
installation of optional output modules. An auxiliary power
supply module can be added which increases the base
system power supply capacity to 8.0 Amps at 24 Vdc.
In multi-loop form, the PEGAsys ML panel (P/N 76-100000-
600) consists of a CCM, one (1) power-supply assembly,
one (1) RX/TX module and one (1) multi-loop motherboard
mounted in the enclosure. The unique multi-loop
motherboard provides the ability to connect up to eight (8)
RX/TX modules to the system which allows for a full 2,040
addressable points to be connected to the PEGAsys ML
system.
Auxiliary enclosures are available to allow the system to
be expanded. The auxiliary enclosure has the same di-
mensions as that of the main enclosure, with the absence
of the window in the door. There are optional backplanes
that install in the expansion enclosure. This allows the num-
ber of output modules and system power supplies to be
expanded. To allow for maximum system flexibility and ex-
pansion, enclosure(s) and backplane(s) can be added to
the system. See Appendix B for further system expansion
details.
1-1 July 2003
PEGAsys™

1-2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

The following paragraphs give a brief description of each SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY

component used in the PEGAsys system. For functional AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE SYSTEM SILENCE
ACKNOWLEDGE
descriptions of each component, see Chapter 3 of this ALARM SUPERVISORY
SYSTEM
SCROLL
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET
manual.
1-2.1 Central Control Module (CCM) R

The CCM assembly is the heart of the system and is com-

prised of two (2) printed circuit board (PCB) assemblies,
the display module and the main processor module. The Figure 1-3. Display Module Assembly
CCM controls the operation and supervision of all the sys- 1-2.3 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
tem modules and software within the PEGAsys system. It
receives loop device data from the RX/TX module, pro- The RX/TX functions as the hardware and software inter-
cesses the data based on pre-programmed instructions face between the field devices and the CCM. The RX/TX
and transmits output commands to the output modules, receives control requests from the CCM, and establishes
field devices and display module(s). communications with the field devices. The RX/TX receives
status changes from the field devices and reports these
1-2.2 Display Module changes to the CCM. The RX/TX, shown in Figure 1-4, is
The display module assembly, attached to the main pro- capable of communicating with up to 255 intelligent de-
cessor PCB, provides the system with the operator inter- vices and complies with the wiring requirements of NFPA
face for control switches, system status LEDs, system Style 4, 6 and 7 (with the use of the loop isolator devices).
trouble/alarm buzzer, an 80-character (2 x 40) LCD dis- Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will permit “T” tapping or
play and an integral numeric keypad. The keypad is used branch circuitry.
for entering the security password and navigating through 1-2.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly
the user menus. The system buzzer provides two (2) dis-
tinctly different signaling patterns for audible warning of The power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-010)
system alarms and troubles. is comprised of a PCB assembly and an AC/DC switching
power supply unit. The switching power supply unit pro-
vides 4 Amps of 24 Vdc from the 120/240 Vac input power.
The PCB assembly is a microprocessor based unit which
provides the system with:
• Battery charging and supervision
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY • AC power supervision
AC POWER

ALARM
SYSTEM TROUBLE SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SILENCE
• 24 Vdc supervision
SUPERVISORY
SYSTEM
SCROLL
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET
• Battery load test
R
• 24 Vdc ground fault detection (+/-)
• Auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs

Processor Display Reset

Port Switch Display Trouble
LED
BUZZER
PLG2

PLG3
SW1

DS1
PRINT PORT
SUPPLY FAULT
EARTH FAULT

24 VDC
0V
PLG2
PLG1

Loop Isolator
JK2

JK3

TB6
JK1

for Style 7
Display PC Port 24 Vdc from
Port Power Supply

Figure 1-2. Central Control Module (CCM)

Figure 1-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)

July 2003 1-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

combinations of RX/TX and output modules that can be

used with a Multi-Loop Motherboard are as follows:

No. of RX/TX(s) No. of Output Modules

1 or 2 1–7
3 1–6
4 1–5
5 1–4
6 1–3
7 1–2
8 1
JP10

RS-232

TB11
RET
+24V

TB8 TB7 TB6 TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 TB1 JP9

RS-485

TB10
W1 JP8 JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4 JP3 JP2 JP1 COM TBL

Figure 1-5. Power Supply/Charger Assembly COM ALM

SIG GND
485A
485B
RET
1-2.5 Basic Motherboard J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7
+24V
TB9

The basic motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100007-001) is

an assembly which can accept up to eight (8) output mod-
ule circuit board assemblies. The motherboard is mounted
to the back of the system enclosure and/or the auxiliary
enclosures. It distributes 24 Vdc power and bus communi-
cations to the output modules. The bus communications
are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connec-
tion. The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power supply
via a two-conductor wiring harness. The motherboard
mounts to standoffs on the back of the main and expan-
sion enclosures with screws which are provided.
J9
RS-485
Figure 1-7. Multi-Loop Motherboard
1-2.7 Output Modules
The optional output modules allow the PEGAsys system
to interface with external auxiliary devices. These auxil-
iary devices can be audible/visual signal devices, HVAC
systems, elevator recall, power shut down, remote annun-
ciators, agent/sprinkler release system and any other con-
trol type output which may need to be interfaced to the
system.
The output modules plug into the motherboard assembly

TB2
located on the backplate of the system enclosure. Each
R1 W1 COM TBL
COM ALM
module occupies one slot in a motherboard assembly. The
SIG GND
485A
485B
modules and the CCM communicate over the RS-485
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8
RET
+24V based bus, which uses a six-conductor, phone-type cable
TB1
to connect the CCM to the motherboard.
Figure 1-6. Basic Motherboard The PEGAsys single-loop panel has the ability to support
1-2.6 Multi-Loop Motherboard a maximum of sixteen (16) output modules, in any combi-
nation. However, no more than eight (8) of any one type of
The multi-loop motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100017- module can be used. The system is limited to one City-Tie
001) is an assembly which can accept up to eight (8) Module.
RX/TX modules and provide connections for up to seven
(7) output module circuit board assemblies. The ML The PEGAsys multi-loop panel has the ability to support a
motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the back of the maximum of twenty-three (23) output modules, in any com-
main system enclosure. It distributes 24 Vdc power, CCM- bination in the system. However, no more than eight (8) of
RX/TX communications for up to eight (8) RX/TX mod- any one type of module can be used, and the system is
ules and bus communications to the output modules. The limited to one City-Tie Module.
bus communications are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone The following paragraphs describe each available output
cable) style connection. A single RJ-12 connection con- module in greater detail.
nects the ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX commu-
nications. The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power
supply via a two-conductor wiring harness. The allowable

76-100016-001 1-3 July 2003

PEGAsys™

1-2.7.1 SIGNAL OUTPUT MODULE 1-2.7.3 AGENT RELEASE OUTPUT MODULE

The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of
eight (8) Alarm Sounder/Signal Output cards, thus provid- eight (8) agent release output modules, providing up to
ing thirty-two (32) possible Class B, Style "Y" signal cir- eight (8) release circuits and twenty-four (24) signal out-
cuits. Each Alarm Sounder/Signal Output card is equipped puts on those modules.
with supervised 24 Vdc outputs which can operate as Class
B, Style “Y” or Class A, Style “Z” indicating circuits (see
Figure 1-8).
76-100003-001

Figure 1-10. Agent Release Output Module

1-2.7.4 CITY-TIE MODULE
The City-Tie (Notification) Module will provide connection
Figure 1-8. Signal Output Module and operation for local energy or shunt type master boxes
1-2.7.2 RELAY OUTPUT MODULE and reverse polarity styles of off-premises reporting.

The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of

eight (8) Auxiliary Relay Output cards, allowing up to thirty-
two (32) relays. Each Auxiliary Relay Output card is
equipped with four (4) Form C, dry-contact relay outputs.
The ability to isolate an individual relay output is provided
through the system operator menu.
76-100002-001

Figure 1-11. City Tie Module

Figure 1-9. Relay Output Module

July 2003 1-4 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

1-2.8 Remote Display/Control Modules S2 S1 LK17

LK32

The remote display control modules permit system events

ATM-L/R
LK16 LK15
Out B 16 32
LK31 LK30
Out A 15 31
to be displayed, and operator intervention to be accom- In B LK14 LK13 14 30
In A 13 LK29 LK28 29
plished, from more than one location in a facility. Two styles W1 LK12
12
LK11 11
28
27
of remote display modules are available; Model RDCM is 4.625 LK10 LK9
10
9
LK27 LK26 26

25
+24 V 8 LK24 24
a duplicate of the PEGAsys Display/Control Module and 5.000 Com
PS Flt LK8 LK7
7
6
LK25
23
22
allows full operator intervention and system control, while Earth Gnd
LK6 LK5
5
4
LK23 LK22
21
20
3 19
Model RDM is a display-only module that only permits the A
B
Trouble
Sup.
Lamp Test
Com LK4
2
LK21 LK20
18
LK3 1 17
Sil. Out Ack
viewing of the current system events. Pre Alm Reset
LK2 LK1
LK19 LK18

Alarm Silence
Pwr On Drill
0.188

1.375 5.175
8.000
System Status Display

SYSTEM
Note:
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE SILENCE
ACKNOWLEDGE
ALARM SUPERVISORY
SYSTEM
SCROLL Maintain a minumum one-half (1/2) inch clearance around ATM-L
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET
and ATM-R Modules when installed in mounting enclosure.
1 2 3 4 5

R 6 7 8 9 0 Figure 1-13. Module Mounting Dimensions

1-2.10 Network Interface Card
The Network Interface Card allows multiple PEGAsys
Figure 1-12. RDCM Keypad
Control Units to be combined into an integrated, peer-to-
1-2.9 ATM Series Driver Modules peer network for annunciation, event output control, and
operator intervention.
The ATM Series Driver Modules permit third-party graphi-
cal annunciators and large numbers of auxiliary relays to NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
CAT. NO. 74-200036-001
be used with the PEGAsys Control Unit. Two types of driver J1 DS4 DS2 DS3 DS1
modules can be used, Models ATM-L and ATM-R.
N2 N1 I2 I1
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1
The Model ATM-L Annunciator Driver Module provides the C26

PEGAsys Control Unit with up to 32 programmable, su- D

TB4 TB2 TB3 TB1
1

CR3
U12
pervised LED outputs for graphical or tabular annuncia- CR2 K2 CR1
K3
K1

C27
tors, along with 6 system-level LED outputs and 5 1
R23

U13
system-level input circuits for functional switches.
RV11

U11
RV12

K4 R46
C12
The system-level LEDs correspond to the following gen- RV6 RV8 RV2
R45 GND
TP1
RV10

+5
U2
eral conditions: Module Power, Alarm, Pre-Alarm, Alarm RV4 RV9 RV3 C20
1 TP2
C23

RV5 RV7 RV1 I1

E1

Y1
R24

Silence, Supervisory, and Trouble. R10

E8

TP3
+ N1

C13 TP4
R25

N2
R6
R5

R3
E7

E3
E6
R4

E5

E2
E4

U7 C4
+
C3

+
The input circuits for functional switches provide for the 1
TP5
I2

R14
TP6
following operator intervention: System Reset, Event Ac- R22
C5 1
C2

U3
R36
R2

U18
knowledgment, Alarm Silence, Fire Drill, and Lamp Test. R20 1 1 U5 C11 C14
C18
R13
R21

R41
R40 1 U4

The Model ATM-R Relay Driver Module can activate up to U20

U19
1
1
U21
R44
C16 1 1
R12 R19
32 programmable, supervised relays.
C1

U14 R17 U16 R32

C10
R43

C25 R29 R33

R15
1 R1 C22 R34
C9 U17 U10 U9
Q4 C8 1
The PEGAsys supports up to 16 ATM-L or ATM-R Driver Q3
R7
U15
U8

Modules, or any combination of these two modules, along Q1 1 1 1 1

+
R42

R26 R31 R38

Q2 C7
R28
with RDCMs and RDMs, that does not exceed 31 total 1
U6 R18 R27 C17
C15 C24

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

addresses.
Figure 1-14. Network Interface Card

76-100016-001 1-5 July 2003

PEGAsys™

1-2.11 Standby Batteries 1-2.13 SmartOne Detector Bases

Space is provided within the central control panel enclo-
sure for up to two (2) 12 V, 33 AH, sealed lead-acid batter-
ies used for 24-, 60- or 90-hour standby operation. If
additional batteries are required, an optional battery en-
closure is available. The enclosure (Figure 1-15) is a heavy
duty steel cabinet that can house up to two (2) 40 AH bat-
teries. For installation information, see Paragraph 7-9.1.
The SmartOne series of detection devices use universal
mounting bases which are available in three styles:
1. The 4SB is a sub-floor style 4-inch base with an out-
side diameter that matches that of the low profile
SmartOne detectors. The 4SB, shown in Figure 1-17,
mounts to standard 3 inch/3.5-inch, or 100mm electri-
cal boxes.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

STANDBY BATTERIES
KIDDE

Figure 1-15. Battery Enclosure

1-2.12 Intelligent Loop Devices
The SmartOne® Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm Devices
provides the PEGAsys control system with smoke and heat
detection, and necessary monitoring and control functions
required by advanced fire alarm systems. The following
paragraphs describe each available intelligent detection
device.
Figure 1-17. 4-inch Detector Base
2. The 6SB model, shown in Figure 1-18, is a tradition-
ally styled detector base with an integral trim ring which
provides coverage for any inconsistencies between the
electrical box and ceiling material. The 6SB mounts to
standard 3 inch/3.5 inch/4-inch electrical boxes.

Figure 1-16. SmartOne Detection Device

1-2.12.1 SMARTONE IONIZATION DETECTOR Figure 1-18. 6-inch Detector Base
The SmartOne Ionization smoke detector provides true dis- 1-2.14 Addressable Contact Input Device
tributed-intelligence, addressable microprocessor-based
The SmartOne Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) al-
smoke detection to the PEGAsys system.
lows an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire
1-2.12.2 SMARTONE PHOTOELECTRIC alarm devices (i.e., water flow and tamper switches) to the
DETECTOR PEGAsys system. The contact monitor is also used to in-
The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detector provides true terface to manual alarm, manual release and abort sta-
distributed-intelligence, addressable microprocessor- tions.
based smoke detection to the PEGAsys system.
1-2.12.3 SMARTONE HEAT DETECTOR
The SmartOne Thermistor heat detector provides true dis- 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
tributed-intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-based PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED

heat detection to the PEGAsys system.

ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
SmartOne TM

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721
MODEL AI, N/O

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION

06-235578-001

400 MAIN ST.

Figure 1-19. Addressable Contact Input Device

July 2003 1-6 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

1-2.15 Addressable Relay Output Device SHORT-2 SHORT-1

The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001)

J1
provides the PEGAsys system with a Form C dry-contact

LOOP ISOLATOR
interface for remote control applications.
DS2 DS1

RX/TX
LED
Underwriters
R Laboratories Inc. R

LISTED

REFER TO
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 INSTALLATION MANUAL
P/N 76-100016-001
(+) (-) (+) (-)
N/O COM N/C
PC PC PC PC FOR MODULE INSTALL. KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
PROCEDURES ASHLAND, MA 01721

TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED

TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
TM

FOR SERVICE SEND TO:

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-408004-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721
SmartOne

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION

06-235577-001
MODEL AO

Figure 1-23. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount

400 MAIN ST.

Figure 1-20. Addressable Relay Output Device

1-2.16 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
Underwriters
Laboratories
The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting
R

LISTED

particles of combustion products in air-handling systems.

DUCT
DETECTOR
MODEL
Figure 1-24. Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount
DH-2000
R

1-2.18 ORION XT Interface Module

The PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM) permits
direct connection of an ORION XT High-Sensitivity Smoke
Detector (HSSD) to a signaling line circuit of the PEGAsys
Control Unit. The ORION XT reports pre-alarm, alarm and
trouble status by individual location (i.e., address) to the
PEGAsys Control Unit via the PALM.
The PALM is housed within the ORION XT HSSD enclo-
sure and plugs into a receptacle on the Detector's printed
circuit board.
Figure 1-21. Air Duct Housing
1-2.17 Loop Isolator Devices
The SmartOne series of loop isolation devices, shown in
Figures 1-22 through 1-24, offer optional loop isolation
which protects the loop from wire-to-wire short conditions
(NFPA Style 7.0).

Figure 1-25. PALM Interface Module for

ORION XT HSSD

Figure 1-22. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone

76-100016-001 1-7 July 2003

PEGAsys™

1-2.19 Addressable AlarmLine Module Table 1-1. System Specifications

The Addressable AlarmLine Module (AAM) permits an ITEM CHARACTERISTICS
AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the
Pow er Supply
PEGAsys Control Unit. The AAM transmits pre-alarm,
alarm, and trouble signals to the Central Control Module *Power Requirement: 120/220 V, 50/60 Hz
via the RX/TX’s signaling line circuit. Alternatively, the AAM
120 Vac, 1.9 Amps
can be configured to transmit an overheat signal to the P.S. Input (Per Module)
220 Vac, .95 Amps
Control Unit for those applications that require excessively-
high temperature indications. P.S. Output (Per Module) 24 Vdc, 4 Amps

Bat. Charger Output: 26.4 Vdc, 3 Amps

TM
Aux. Outputs: (2) 24 Vdc, 1.5 Amps each

CCM

Signal Output: 24 Vdc, 2 Amps

Release Output: 24 Vdc, 2 Amps

Relay Contact Rating: 1 Amp @ 30 Vdc

Trouble Relay Rating: 1 Amp @ 30 Vdc

Figure 1-26. Addressable AlarmLine Module
RX/TX Module
1-2.20 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module
Max. Voltage: 26.4 Vdc
The Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) permits
Min. Voltage: 19.0 Vdc
notification appliances to be controlled via commands is-
sued from the PEGAsys Control Unit’s signaling line cir- Max. Line Capacitance: 0.25 uF
cuit. The ASM is designed to mount in a standard electrical
Max. Line Resistance: 26 Ohms
box.
Max. Addressable
AUXILIARY KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. 255 per RX/TX
MODE ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
Devices:
P1=2&3 CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
S1=1&2 ON INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
A B A B PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITED
Release Module
PC LINE ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED

TM Release Output 2 Amps @ 24 Vdc

DEVICE
AUX./AUDIO MODE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _
SETTINGS Signal Output 2 Amps @ 24 Vdc each
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM)
AUX. IN TROUBLE OUTPUT CKT. Capable of releasing solenoids
+ - + - + - - + UL Release Output Type:
AUDIO
CKT. R
(suppression and sprinkler)
MODE
FM
P1=1&2
S1=3 ON APPROVED
Signal Audible Module

(4) Class B, Style "Y" or

Figure 1-27. Addressable Signal/Sounder Module Signal Outputs: (2) Class A Style "Z"
2 Amps @ 24 Vdc each

1-3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION Relay Module

System power specifications are outlined in Table 1-1. (4) Form C Contacts,
Contact Rating: 2 Amps @ 30 Vdc or
1 Amp @ 120 Vac

City Tie Module

Shunt Contact: 5 Amps @ 24 Vdc, Resistive

500 mA max. @ 24 Vdc,

Local Energy Output:
Current Limited

Local Energy Supervisory: 11 mA

Master Box Trip Current

Local Energy Load:
0.25 Amps typical

*Note: Refer to Appendix A for total system power and AC

branch circuit requirements.

July 2003 1-8 76-100016-001


CHAPTER 2
OPERATION
2-1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the PEGAsys™ system controls
and indicators located on the display panel. It also describes
the operating procedures and menu system.
2-1.1 Modes of Operation
There are two modes of PEGAsys system operation:
1. In the default operation, the panel will be set to latch
all alarm inputs in the system. The latching operation
will not allow the loop input devices to generate an
"alarm off" signal that would possibly interrupt a dis-
charge time delay sequence. To return the panel to
normal, the "RESET" button will need to be pushed.
2. The second mode of operation is non-latching. This
option can be enabled using the PEGAsys Configura-
tion Software (PCS) to define if a loop device input is
to be non-latching. The non-latching operation will al-
low the loop input devices to generate an "alarm off"
signal to the panel. When this signal is received, the
panel would interrupt the discharge time delay se-
quence of operation. However, all outputs that had
been activated previous to the "alarm off" signal will
remain on and latched until the panel is reset.
The advantage of offering latching or non-latching op-
eration per loop input device is that it allows the in-
staller/designer to customize the system. This allows
the intermixing of latching and non-latching devices to
protect critical areas where both types may be speci-
fied.
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
ALARM SUPERVISORY
PRE-ALARM SILENCE
Figure 2-1. System Front Panel
76-100016-001 2-1
PEGAsys™
When an alarm returns to a normal state (alarm off), the
buzzer will sound in a pulsed fashion. The "alarm off" con-
dition must be acknowledged to silence the buzzer. Dur-
ing the "alarm off" condition, the audible device provides
no sound. The following summarizes the buzzer opera-
tion:
• Alarm condition is indicated by a continuous ON
signal,
• Alarm OFF is indicated by a ½-second ON ½-second
OFF signal, and
• Trouble condition is indicated by a 1 second ON, and
1 second OFF continuous beeping.
Every individual change of status must be individually ac-
knowledged by pressing the <ACKLDGE> (acknowledge)
button to silence the Audible device.
2-2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
The control and indicators of the PEGAsys system are lo-
cated on the display panel, shown in Figure 2-1. The dis-
play panel is mounted on top of the CCM. To gain access
to the CCM, the panel door must be open. Table 2-1 lists
controls and indicators for the display unit, listing name
and functional description.
2-2.1 LCD Display
The display panel contains an 80-character (2 x 40) alpha-
numeric display. This LCD display is used to present sys-
tem status. In the procedure section of this chapter there
are several simulated LCD display readouts. The LCD dis-
play readouts will be used to aid users in the operation of
the system.
SYSTEM SILENCE
ACKNOWLEDGE
SYSTEM
SCROLL
RESET
July 2003
PEGAsys™

Table 2-1. Controls and Indicators

LE D FUNCTION

When illuminated, indicates that the system is receiving AC input power. When off, indicates
AC POWER an AC input power failure has occurred (trouble condition) and the system has switched to a
battery standby condition.

ALARM When illuminated, indicates an alarm condition has been reported by an input device.

When illuminated, indicates a smoke or heat detector or an HSSD has sensed a level of
PRE-ALARM
smoke or heat which exceeds its pre-alarm setpoint.

SYSTEM TROUBLE When illuminated, indicates a trouble condition exists in the system.

When illuminated, indicates a supervisory condition has been reported by a system-input

SUPERVISORY
device programmed for supervisory input.

SILENCE When illuminated, indicates the signal/audible outputs have been silenced.

SWITCH FUNCTION

When pressed after an alarm ON (alarm OFF if input device is set for non-latching) trouble,
supervisory, or pre-alarm ON condition has occured, it silences the control unit's audible
SYSTEM ACKNOWLEDGE buzzer. The "ALARM", "TROUBLE", "SUPERVISORY", or "PRE-ALARM" LED indicator
glows steady to indicate that the condition has been acknowledged. Subsequent conditions
will cause the control unit to resound the above sequence.

When pressed after all active alarms have been acknowledged and cleared, the system:
Resets auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs used to power 4 wire detectors
Resets all latched alarm conditions.
Returns all relays to their normal state.
SYSTEM RESET
Displays "System Reset" on the visual display.
Turns the "ALARM" indicator off.
The reset button must be pressed once to reset 4-wire smoke and HSSD detectors and
once to reset the Control Unit

When pressed after acknowledging current alarm, it silences the system signal outputs which
have been programmed as silenceable. The "SILENCE" indicator illuminates to indicate that
SILENCE
the signal outputs have been silenced. Pressing the "SILENCE" switch does not affect the
relay output status.

When pressed during an active alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition, will cause the LCD to
SCROLL scroll through the active event buffer(s). An alarm condition will not allow supervisory or
troubles to be viewed. Supervisory condition will not allow the troubles buffer to be viewed.

NUMERIC KEYPAD (1-0) Use to enter password and system information into the menu system.

BACKSPACE Use to exit the menu system and to correct wrong entries.

RETURN Used as the Enter key when using the menu system.

July 2003 2-2 76-100016-001


2-2.2 Audible Device
The Display Panel also contains an audible device which
generates two separate audible tones: one for alarms and
one for all other events. This device sounds continuously
when a new alarm condition is received until the condition
is acknowledged. It also sounds intermittently when a
trouble, supervisory or pre-alarm condition is received un-
til the condition is acknowledged.
2-3 SYSTEM SECURITY
The PEGAsys system provides three distinct levels of pro-
gram protection, as required by UL Standard 864. The user
can only access the system by entering a valid password.
Typical valid passwords consist of three or four charac-
ters, but may be up to eight characters in length.
2-3.1 Levels of Security
The three security levels are: Level One (system owner),
Level Two (system installer) and System Manufacturer (the
highest security level—reserved for the system manufac-
turer). Passwords consist of numeric characters (0-9) and
allow access to the system from the integral keypad of the
CCM. Passwords help to lock out any possible entry to the
menus through the CCM keypad. Alphanumeric charac-
ters can only be used with the PCS program. However,
they will lock out any possible entry to the menus from the
keypad if used.
If alphanumeric passwords are necessary for a particular
application, it is recommended that the Level One pass-
word be numeric and the Level Two password be alpha-
numeric so as to allow the user to retrieve system
information (system information lists) and also prevent a
user from changing any programmed system parameters.
2-3.2 Default Passwords
The PEGAsys system provides protection from unautho-
rized entry to the system menus by utilizing two levels of
default passwords: Level One and Level Two. This feature
provides two separate passwords, which increase the se-
curity of the system. Default passwords are set when the
system is shipped from Kidde. These default passwords
are:
• Level One = 987
• Level Two = 1865
These default passwords are valid until other passwords
are programmed into the system.
2-3.3 Entering Passwords
The password entry procedure is listed below:
1. Verify that the system status is displayed.
2. Press zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
76-100016-001
PEGAsys™
3. Type in three or four digit password into keypad. En-
sure a pound sign (#) appears for each key pressed.
Note: Use the default password if a new password has
not been set.
↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
4. Press the return (↵
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2-4 SYSTEM POWER-UP
The following step-by-step procedure is for initial power-
up of the CCP.
1. Perform the installation checkout procedure in Chap-
ter 7 of this manual.
2. Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. Verify
that the display reads "Main Processor Power On".
Ensure that the audible device is buzzing continuously.
3. Press the display module reset switch. Verify that the
audible device is silenced.
4. Verify that the display reads as follows:
MAIN PROCESSOR
POWER ON
5. After ten seconds, verify that the display reads as fol-
lows:
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON
RXTX1
Note: For multi-loop systems only. The above and be-
low RX/TX messages will repeat themselves for
each RX/TX module installed in the system. The
above message will be displayed while the sys-
tem is initializing itself. This initialization can take
up to 90 seconds.
To clear the below RX/TX message, use the
AutoLearn function from the menu function or up-
load the configuration from the PCS program. If
using PCS software, verify that the correct num-
ber of RX/TX loops is enabled in the Loops Topic
of the configuration file prior to uploading.
RX/TX 1 NOT REGISTERED ON
RX/TX LOOP 1
6. Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicators
are lit.
7. Connect the backup batteries to the power supply in
accordance with the procedure in Chapter 7.
8. Press the <ACKLDGE> button. After approximately
one minute the display will momentarily read:
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFF
9. Verify the display reads the incorrect time and date.
10. Set time and date as follows:
a. Press zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
2-3 July 2003
PEGAsys™
b. Type in the default Level One password (987).
c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
d. Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the display
reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM)
e. Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then
↵) key. Verify
MM=minutes 0-59). Press the return (↵
that the display reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
1:AM 2:PM
f. Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 for
PM).
g. When the date menu appears, set the date using
the same procedure as for time setting, described
in steps d and e above.
Note: If there has been a mistake in the entered data,
press the backspace key as many times as re-
quired to return to the incorrect data, then re-en-
ter data from that point.
11. The power-up procedure is complete at this point. The
system is now ready for loop device registration and
programming which is covered in this chapter.
2-5 SYSTEM MENUS
PEGAsys has a built-in menu structure. This menu struc-
ture has been implemented to aid users with system oper-
ating functions. The following paragraphs describe the
menu structure, accessing the menu, exiting the menu and
menu functions. Figure 2-1 shows the system menu struc-
ture.
2-5.1 Menu Structure
The PEGAsys menu structure consists of a main menu
and multiple sub-level menus. The sub-level menus may
also contain multiple sub-level menus. The main menu dis-
plays after a valid password is entered. The top level menu
can be accessed from any sub-level menu almost any-
time by pressing the backspace key located on the key-
pad.
Note: The top level menu may not be available by using
the backspace key while certain types of program-
ming are being performed.
It is possible to access a previous, higher level menu from
a lower level menu by pressing the backspace key.
The choices of available sub menus after a valid pass-
word has been entered correspond to the security level
password that has been entered.
July 2003
The main menu for the Level One, Level Two and Manu-
facturer security level is:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
Any one of the basic functions listed in a main menu can
be selected by pressing the numeric key of the system’s
keypad, which corresponds to the desired function (e.g.,
to select the LIST function from the main menu, press the
number two (2) key on the system keypad). Lower level
functions may also be selected from sub-level menus us-
ing the numeric keys.
2-5.2 Accessing the System Menus
Perform the steps in Paragraph 2-3.3.
2-5.3 Exiting the System Menus
To exit the system's menus, perform the following steps:
1. Press the backspace key as many times necessary to
reach the top level menu, shown below:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Press the backspace key. Verify that the system re-
turns to standby. The display should read:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL HH:MM MM-DD-YR
40 CHARACTER CUSTOM MESSAGE
Note: When exiting the system menus, if the system is
normal the display panel should show the time and
date as shown in the above step.
2-5.4 Menu Functions
Tables 2-2 through 2-5 list and provide a brief description
of typical functions that can be performed using the
PEGAsys system’s menus. In addition, the tables provide
the security access levels and a keystroke formula for each
function. The keystroke formula is a sequence of num-
bers that is entered via the system keypad to access a
particular function. These formulas provide the path from
the main menu to the desired function. Formulas are pro-
vided for each access level. After the formula is entered,
some of the functions require the return key to be pressed
to start implementing the function.
Most functions will require additional data to be entered to
implement the function, such as a device address or de-
sired alarm threshold.
2-5.4.1 ISOLATE MENU FUNCTION
The isolate menu function (Table 2-2) permits the opera-
tor to isolate field devices and output modules. Isolating
any device immediately places the system in a trouble con-
dition and initiates an audible trouble alarm and a printout
with the time, date and device isolated. The feature is typi-
cally used to temporarily isolate auxiliary devices during a
system test.
2-4 76-100016-001
 PEGAsys™

PLACE FOLDOUT
SHEET HERE

Figure 2-2. Menu Structure

76-100016-001 2-5 July 2003

PEGAsys™

BLANK FOR
FOLDOUT SHEET

July 2003 2-6 76-100016-001


2-5.4.2 LIST MENU FUNCTION
The list menu function (Table 2-3) permits the operator to
list various system parameters. All lists are real-time ac-
tual system conditions which are displayed and printed with
the time and date.
2-5.4.3 SET MENU FUNCTION
The set menu function permits the operator to program
various system parameters within the system. A few ex-
amples are shown in Table 2-4.
2-5.4.4 TEST MENU FUNCTION
The test menu function, shown in Table 2-5, allows the
operator to test an individual or a group of field devices.
On command, a detector or contact input device can be
tested, and results will be printed and displayed at the
Central Control Panel. The test procedure in the device is
activated by imposing a signal within the device that will
cause an alarm output. The Control Panel verifies that an
alarm output is generated, and reports “Test Result OK”
for each device.
2-6 MODES OF OPERATION
The PEGAsys system has four modes of operation. Each
mode has different indications and actions required. The
following paragraphs describe each mode, indications and
actions to be taken, if required.
2-6.1 Normal Standby Mode
This is the typical mode of the system. In this mode, no
alarm, trouble or supervisory conditions exist in the sys-
tem. The system display will show the time and date. In
this mode, the LCD could read:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 11:06 AM_05-04-90
40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE
The system provides an option which allows the System
Status Normal message to be replaced with a display of
battery charging voltage and current for the system standby
batteries. For example:
PS01_26.0 V_0.10_A_ _ _ _ _11:06 AM_05-04-90
40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE
The green AC POWER LED will be illuminated to indicate
that the system’s main power source is normal.
Note: In the Normal Standby Operation state, it is pos-
sible for the 80-character display to show data
other than the time and date. This occurs when
the system menus are being accessed either lo-
cally or remotely through one of its serial ports.
This condition will be indicated by the menu se-
lections being displayed on the display panel.
In the Normal Standby Mode, no indicating LEDs will be
illuminated other than the “AC POWER.”
76-100016-001
PEGAsys™
2-6.2 Active Alarm Mode
The system enters an alarm mode if a device (or devices)
has detected an alarm condition, such as smoke/heat
above the alarm threshold level. There are two types of
alarms which can occur:
1. Device Alarm–An alarm in which a device has com-
municated the alarm status properly to the Central Con-
trol Panel, by providing the alarmed device address
for indication to the operator.
2. Zone Alarm–An alarm condition detected by one or
several devices, but which cannot be reported by a
specific device due to a malfunction in communica-
tions between the system and the alarmed device(s).
This is a redundant feature to increase system reli-
ability and is called FailSoft Mode.
Note: A device can signal a zone alarm to the system
during some communication failures.
2-6.2.1 ALARM MODE INDICATIONS
The following indicates the system is in its alarm mode of
operation:
• The red “ALARM” LED will be illuminated and there
will be a continuous audible signal by the system buzzer
at the panel, and
• The 80-character display will cycle between all cur-
rently active alarms. See Figure 2-3 for example.
Figure 2-3. Active Alarms Example
Note: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the Device Address
“1000-8000” will be displayed depending on which
RX/TX module detects the zone alarm.
The outputs which have been previously programmed for
activation upon alarm by the specific devices will be turned
on (e.g., signal audible signaling devices, control relays
for HVAC shutdown or elevator recall).
2-6.2.2 ALARM MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the sys-
tem is set into alarm:
1. Press the display panel’s <ACKLDGE> button to ac-
knowledge the displayed alarm condition. The 80-char-
acter display will continue to cycle between any
remaining alarms which have not been acknowledged.
2-7 July 2003
PEGAsys™

Table 2-2. Isolate Menu Function

Function Description Formula Access Level

Isolate Loop Device Isolate/De-isolate an RCU by address 1-1 1/2/M

Isolate Module Signal Output Isolate/De-isolate a signal module output circuit by address 1-2-1 1/2/M

Isolate Module Release Signal Output Isolate/De-isolate a release module signal output by address. 1-2-2 1/2/M

Isolate CCM Signal Output Isolate/De-isolate A CCM signal output 1-2-3 1/2/M

Isolate Module Relay Output Isolate/De-isolate a I/O module relay output by address 1-3-1 1/2/M

Isolate CCM Relay Output Isolate/De-isolate CCM relay output 1-3-2 1/2/M

Isolate Module Release Output Isolate/De-isolate an agent release output by output address 1-4-1 1/2/M

Isolate CCM Agent Release Output Isolate/De-isolate an agent release output by CCM output address 1-4-2 1/2/M

Isolate City Tie Output Isolate/De-isolate city tie module by output address 1-5 1/2/M

Isolate Digital Input/Output Isolate/De-isolate digital input/output by address 1-6 1/2/M

Global Isolate Inputs Isolate/De-isolate all system input loop devices; modules 1-7-1 2/M

Global Isolate Outputs Isolate/De-isolate all system output modules 1-7-2 2/M

Note: 1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level

Table 2-3. List Menu Function

Function Description Formula Access Level

List Isolated Loop Devices List all Loop Devices which are isolated 2-1-1-1 1/2/M

List Isolated Modules List all modules which are isolated 2-1-2-1 1/2/M

List Isolated CCM outputs List all CCM outputs which are isolated 2-1-2-2 1/2/M

List Event History Buffer (All Events) Lists all recorded event history entries from buffer 2-2-1 1/2/M

List Event History Buffer (Range of Events) Lists a user selectable range of event history entries by date 2-2-2 1/2/M

List a Single Detector Displays a selected detector’s real time smoke/heat level 2-3-1 1/2/M

List Detector Level Lists all system detectors pre-alarm and alarm setpoints and present level. 2-3-2 1/2/M

List Active Alarm(s) List all active system alarm(s). 2-4-1 1/2/M

List Active Supervisory Conditions List all active system supervisory conditions. 2-4-2 1/2/M

List Active Trouble Condition List all active system trouble conditions 2-4-3 1/2/M

List EOC Program List EOC program lines 2-5-1 1/2/M

List RTC Program List RTC program lines 2-5-2 1/2/M

List Loop Device Addresses List all loop devices registered into the system 2-6-1 1/2/M

List Module Addresses List all modules registered into the system 2-6-2 1/2/M

List PC Line Voltage Levels Lists PC line voltage levels at each specified loop device 2-7-1 1/2/M

List Loop Device 9 Vdc power supply level Lists specified loop device 9 volt power supply level 2-7-2 1/2/M

Note: 1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level

July 2003 2-8 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

Table 2-4. Set Menu Function

F u n ctio n D escrip tio n F o rmu la Ac c e s s L e v e l

Set System Time Allows user to set system time 3-1-1 1/2/M

Set System Date Allows user to set system date 3-1-2 1/2/M

Set Display of Battery (V+I) Allow user to set display of battery charging voltage and current. 3-1-3 1/2/M

Set Internal Printer Enable port for internal printer connection 3-2-1-1 1/2/M

Disable Internal Printer Disable port for internal printer connection 3-2-1-2 1/2/M

Set External Printer Enable port for external printer connection 3-2-2-1 1/2/M

Disable External Printer Disable port for external printer connection 3-2-2-2 1/2/M

Set Device Address Allows user to change device address. 3-3-1 2/M

Set Ionization Detector Sensitivity Allows user to adjust Ionization detector pre-alarm and alarm settings 3-3-2-1 2/M

Set Photoelectric Detector Sensitivity Allows user to adjust Photoelectric detector pre-alarm and alarm settings 3-3-2-2 2/M

Set Thermal Detector Sensitivity Allows user to adjust Thermal detector pre-alarm and alarm settings 3-3-2-3 2/M

Register Devices Allows user to register loop devices into system configuration 3-3-3 2/M

De-Register Devices Allows user to de-register loop devices from system configuration 3-3-4 2/M

Blink Control Allows user to disable detector LED blinking 3-3-5 2/M

Set Day/Night Mode Allows user to enable detector for day function. 3-4-1-1 2/M

Set Day / Night Periods Allows user to set Day/Night periods 3-4-1-2 2/M

Activate Day Mode Allows user to activate Day mode 3-4-1-3 2/M

Set 1st level Password Allows user to set 1st level password 3-4-2-1 2/M

Set 2nd level Password Allows user to set 2nd level password. 3-4-2-2 2/M

Enable RTC Program Allows user to enable RTC program line to function 3-4-3-1 2/M

Disable RTC Program Allows user to disable RTC program line from functioning. 3-4-3-2 2/M

Set AutoLearn Mode Allows user to activate the AutoLearn Function 3-4-4 2/M

Allows user to set the alarm verification function and time period for an
Set Alarm Verification 3-4-5 2/M
individual detector or range of detectors.

Set PAS Function Allows user to set the positive alarm sequence for devices 3-4-6 2/M

Clear Event Log Allows user to clear event history buffer entries 3-4-7 2/M

Global Acknowledge Enable Enables the Global Acknowledge Feature 3-8-1 2/M

Global Acknowledge Disable Disables the Global Acknowledge Feature 3-8-2 2/M

Note: 1. For installation in the state of California, Alarm Verification Time must not exceed 30 seconds.
2. 1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level

76-100016-001 2-9 July 2003

PEGAsys™

Table 2-5. Test Menu Functions

F u n ctio n D escrip tio n F o rmu la Ac c e s s L e v e l

Lamp Test Enable user to test system LEDs functi onali ty 4-1 1/2/M

Allows user to acti vate an electroni c test of a detector or group of

Loop Devi ce Test 4-2-1 1/2/M
detectors

Battery Test Allows user to acti vate a battery test to veri fy battery capaci ty 4-3 1/2/M

Enable Walk Test Allows user to speci fy a range of devi ces to walk test 4-4-1 2/M

Di sable Walk Test Allows user to di sable walk test mode 4-4-2 2/M

Allows i nstaller to veri fy programmed relati onshi p of i nputs to

Alarm Si mulati on Test 4-5 2/M
outputs by acti vati ng i nputs and veri fyi ng outputs are acti ve

Note: WARNING: The Alarm Simulation Test must be used with care. When activated, the Alarm Simulation
Test (AST) processes pre-programmed outputs which are related to the activated (simulated) input device.
Before using the AST, ensure that any associated outputs are disconnected or isolated to prevent
unexpected outputs (releases, signals or shutdowns).
1 = Level One, 2 = Level Two, M = Manufacturer Level

The <ACKLDGE> button must be pressed once for
each alarm received at the panel.
2. Once all current alarms have been acknowledged, the
alarm indicating circuits (audible devices) can be si-
lenced by operating the “SILENCE” switch.
3. After all of the current alarms have been acknowledged,
verify that the display reads: XXX ALARMS REMAIN.
The “XXX” represents the total of all active alarms. All
active alarms can be viewed on the display by press-
ing the <SCROLL> button.
Note: Only the first 64 alarms will be displayed. Subse-
quent alarms over the initial 64 will not be displayed,
even when any or all of the first 64 alarms clear.
However, all alarms—regardless of the total—will
be processed in the EOC. For a complete list of
active alarms, access the event buffer menu us-
ing the CCM keypad.
4. Any subsequent alarms will cause any silenced alarm
circuits to reactivate. Each additional alarm must be
acknowledged before the alarm indicating circuits can
be silenced.
5. When a non-latching device goes out of alarm, the dis-
play will indicate the device address and produce an
alarm off (AOF) message. For example:
1080 AOF_ _ _ _PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR
40_CHARACTER_LOCATION_MESSAGE
Note: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the address “1000-
8000” will be displayed, indicating that active
device(s) in Failsoft mode on the indicated SLC
have gone out of alarm.
6. Each device which goes out of alarm must be acknowl-
edged with the <ACKLDGE> button (non-latching).
For latching mode: To return the system to normal,
press the <RESET> button once. If powering a 4-wire
detector from the PEGAsys, the <RESET> button will
need to be pushed once to reset the detector and once
to reset the panel to a normal condition.
7. Once all alarms have been cleared in non-latching op-
eration, the display will read: NO ACTIVE ALARM
REMAINS. At this time, the system may be reset by
operating the <RESET> button.
8. When the system is properly reset, the display will
show the System Status Normal message, time and
date. The preceding will happen if no active troubles
or supervisories are present, in which case the “Ac-
tive Troubles” or “Active Supervisories” message will
be displayed.
2-6.3 Active Supervisory Mode
The system enters supervisory mode when it detects an
abnormal condition in the system that has been defined to
be a higher priority than a common trouble. This type of
trouble is usually assigned by the installer/designer to
monitor critical parts of the system.
2-6.3.1 SUPERVISORY MODE INDICATION
The following indicates the system is in the supervisory
mode of operation.
• The yellow SUPERVISORY LED will be flashing at a
one (1) second rate, and there will be a pulsing buzzer
at the CCM. This audible is distinctively different from
the alarm signal pattern at the CCM.
• The 80-character display will cycle between all cur-
rently active supervisory events. See Figure 2-4 for
an example.

July 2003 2-10 76-100016-001


Figure 2-4. Supervisory Example for
Supervisory Mode Indication
2-6.3.2 SUPERVISORY MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the sys-
tem enters the supervisory mode of operation:
1. To silence the supervisory audible signal, all current
supervisories must be acknowledged by pressing the
<ACKLDGE> button. This will silence the system
buzzer.
2. When all supervisory conditions have been acknowl-
edged, the 80-character display will read: XXX AC-
TIVE SUPERVISORIES REMAIN, with XXX
representing the total number of active supervisory
events. All current supervisory conditions can be
viewed on the display by pressing the <SCROLL> but-
ton.
3. As each supervisory condition is cleared, the display
will read one (1) less active supervisory event until all
supervisories are clear. When all active supervisory
events have been cleared, the SUPERVISORY LED
will be extinguished, and the 80-character display will
show the Standby Message (e.g., "System Status Nor-
mal").
Note: The system has the option to acknowledge both
supervisory and common troubles on a global ba-
sis. The panel, by default, will require that each
trouble and supervisory event be acknowledged
individually. However, if the installer wishes to en-
able this function, it can be done by accessing the
"set" menu option using the CCM keypad. Refer
to Table 2-4 for more information on stepping
through the menus to enable and disable the Glo-
bal Acknowledge function. With global acknowl-
edge, a total of thirty (30) troubles and supervisory
events can be acknowledged at one time.
2-6.4 Active Trouble Mode
The system enters trouble mode when it detects an ab-
normal condition that may prevent proper operation (e.g.,
loss of communications with a smoke detector) or when a
pre-alarm condition occurs. Refer to Appendix G for a com-
plete list of trouble conditions.
2-6.4.1 TROUBLE MODE INDICATIONS
The following indicates that the system is in its trouble mode
of operation.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys™
• The yellow TROUBLE LED will be flashing at a one
(1) second rate, and there will be a pulsing panel buzzer
at the CCP. This audible signal is distinctively different
from the alarm audible signal.
• The 80-character display will cycle between all cur-
rently active troubles and pre-alarms. For example:
Figure 2-5. Active Troubles and Pre-Alarms Example
2-6.4.2 TROUBLE MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the sys-
tem is in the trouble mode of operation:
1. To silence the trouble audible signal, all current trouble
conditions must be acknowledged by pressing the
<ACKLDGE> button. This will silence the system
buzzer.
2. When all trouble conditions have been acknowledged,
the 80-character display will read: XXX ACTIVE
TROUBLES REMAIN, with XXX representing the to-
tal number of active troubles. All current trouble condi-
tions can be viewed on the display by pressing the
<SCROLL> button.
Note: Only the first 300 troubles (supervisory or com-
mon) on a Single-Loop will be displayed. Subse-
quent troubles or supervisories will not be
displayed, even if any, or all 300 troubles clear.
However, all of the active troubles or supervisories
will be processed and entered into the event buffer.
For a complete listing of all troubles and
supervisories over the initial 300, access the event
buffer by using the CCM keypad.
For the multi-loop system, only the first 2100
troubles or supervisories will be displayed. Sub-
sequent troubles or supervisories over the first
2100 will not be displayed, even if any, or all 2100
troubles or supervisories clear. However, all
troubles or supervisories—regardless of the total—
will be processed and entered into the event buffer.
For a complete listing of all active troubles and
supervisories, access the event buffer by using
the CCM keypad.
3. As each trouble condition is cleared, the display will
read one (1) less active trouble until all troubles are
cleared. When all active troubles have been cleared,
the “TROUBLE” LED will be extinguished, and the 80-
character display will show the standby message (e.g.,
"System Status Normal").
2-11 July 2003
PEGAsys™
Note: The system has the option to acknowledge both
supervisory and common troubles on a global ba-
sis. The panel, by default, will require that each
trouble be acknowledged individually. However, if
the installer wishes to enable this function, it can
be done by accessing the "set" menu option using
the CCM keypad. Refer to Table 2-4 for more in-
formation on stepping through the menus to en-
able and disable the Global Acknowledge function.
With global acknowledge, a total of thirty (30)
troubles can be acknowledged at one time.
2-7 PRINTING OPERATION
In addition to the LCD display, the PEGAsys system infor-
mation can be viewed using the printer port of the CCM.
For detailed information pertaining to connecting an RS-
232 peripheral device, see Paragraph 7-18.
When the printer port is enabled and a serial printer is
attached, the system will print out all status change infor-
mation and any system information lists that the user would
request from the system using the integral keypad.
2-8 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
The PEGAsys fire alarm system incorporates two unique
programming languages that are easy to understand and
use. These two versatile programming languages, Event
Output Control (EOC) and Real-Time Control (RTC), can
accommodate most any fire alarm control logic applica-
tions. The system is programmed using a personal com-
puter connected to the system via an interface cable.
The two programs are constructed by the system engi-
neer/installer using the PEGAsys Configuration Software
(PCS) program which is Windows® based. The PCS pro-
gram allows the user to configure, verify, upload, down-
load, edit, retrieve, store and print the entire system
configuration program. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns
76-014 and 76-015) for further details.
2-8.1 EOC Programming
The Event Output Control (EOC) program logically com-
bines the system’s input devices with the system's output
devices. The program consists of sequentially numbered
lines of equations containing input addresses, output ad-
dresses and logic operators. When an input becomes true
(active), the system processes the EOC program and ac-
tivates any associated outputs as programmed.
Example:
The simplest event output control (EOC) equation would
be: Input = Output
A basic equation with one or more inputs would be:
Input Operator Input = Output
July 2003
The system normally processes the EOC from left to right.
However, in equations with parentheses, the contents of the
parentheses are executed first. Refer to the PCS manuals
(P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further details.
2-8.1.1 LISTING EOC PROGRAMMING
The system's Event Output Control (EOC) program can be
listed using either the owner's or installer's menu functions.
To list the system's EOC programming:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the EOC program list by typing the formula
2-5-1. The system will then list all lines of the Event Out-
put Control program on the LCD and send a printout to
any attached printer.
2-8.2 RTC Programming
The RTC program permits outputs to be controlled by the
system’s real-time clock. Outputs may be programmed to
occur on an hour, day, week and month time control basis.
Alarm and pre-alarm threshold levels of all or individual de-
tectors can be increased or decreased in sensitivity (within
UL limits) under RTC control. The RTC programming also
provides the ability to control RCU relays, output module re-
lays and smoke detector pre-alarm and alarm set points.
The program consists of sequentially numbered lines, each
containing control object, control content, time, date and day
of week. For further details, refer to the PCS manual.
2-8.2.1 LISTING RTC PROGRAMMING
The RTC program can be listed using either the owner's or
installer's menu functions. To list the RTC programming:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the RTC program by typing the formula
2-5-2. The system will then list all lines of the Real-
Time Control program on the LCD and send a printout
to any attached printer.
2-12 76-100016-001
 PEGAsys™

2-8.2.2 ENABLE/DISABLE RTC PROGRAM LINE
NUMBERS
Each line number of the RTC Program is automatically en-
abled when entered into the system. Once a line number in
the RTC Program has been disabled using the procedure
below, the line will be ignored by the RTC Program until en-
abled. To enable a line number which has been previously
disabled, follow the procedure below; select "ENABLE" in step
2.
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
• Failed communications between the CCM and
RX/TX module (Trouble Condition),
• Failed RX/TX or CCM processor. (Trouble Condi-
tion), or
• Failed input circuit of RCU device.
An alarmed input device on the RX/TX (in FailSoft mode)
can only activate EOC programming if the RX/TX zone is
used as a programmed input (ZA1=1000, ZA2=2000, ZA8 =
8000, etc.).

a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: 2-8.3.4 SYSTEM OUTPUTS

PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD Devices which are classified as system outputs are CCM
signals and relays (programmable/non programmable);
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. output modules (signal outputs, relay outputs, agent re-
2. Select the set RTC program by typing the formula lease outputs, release signal outputs, city tie outputs) and
3-4-3. Verify the display reads: loop devices (addressable relay output module or signal/
sounder module).
1:ENABLE 2:DISABLE
3. Select the desired choice and press return. Verify the 2-8.3.5 SYSTEM OUTPUT MODULES
display reads: The output modules which the system supports are Signal
RTC LINE NUMBER _ _ _ Outputs, Relay Outputs, Agent Release (agent and signal)
outputs and the City Tie output.
4. Type the three digit line number and press the return
key. 2-8.4 Addressing Output Modules
5. Continue with another RTC line or press backspace The output modules include: Signal Audible, Relay Out-
key to cancel this function. put, Agent Release Output, City Tie output and the power
2-8.3 Types of Inputs and Outputs supply module. Output modules refer to any module which
installs into the optional output motherboard or multi-loop
The PEGAsys has various input and output devices/mod- motherboard with the exception of the power supply
ules, which are discussed in the following paragraphs: module(s). The output modules communicate with the CCM
2-8.3.1 SYSTEM INPUTS over the RS-485 communications bus.

Devices which are classified as system inputs are smoke Each module has outputs which can be individually ad-
detectors, heat detectors, addressable contact monitors dressed. The address consists of two (2) alphabetic and
(alarm, trouble, abort, waterflow, manual alarm, manual re- two (2) numeric characters which define the module type,
lease, supervisory and normal) and HSSD detectors report- address and output circuit number. The output module ad-
ing via PALM modules. Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns dress scheme is shown below.
76-014 and 76-015) for further details. SG 1 : 3
I/O Circuit Number (1-4),
2-8.3.2 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (RCU) See note 1.
The RCU input and output devices, which are connected to Module Address (1-8),
See note 2.
the RX/TX loop(s), are specified in the EOC program by their
Module Type,
four-digit addresses. See note 3.
2-8.3.3 RX/TX LOOPS SG – Signal/Audible Output
RY – Relay Output
The system specifies the RX/TX loop controller using its loop CT – City Tie Output
AR – Agent Release Output
number followed by three zeros (1000 for RX/TX 1) in single RS – Release Signal Output
loop systems and (1000-8000) in multi-loop systems. The PS – Power Supply Monitor Module
specifier (1000-8000) will appear in cases when trouble con-
ditions are present on a particular RX/TX loop controller (i.e., Figure 2-6. Output Module Address Scheme
a PC Line Short on RX/TX 1 would be displayed as "RX/TX
PC Line Short Loop 1").
RX/TX loop (zone) alarms occur if a loop device alarm ini-
tiates under one of the following conditions:

76-100016-001 2-13 July 2003

PEGAsys™
Note:
1. The output modules vary in number of outputs. Refer
to section one “component description” for thorough
descriptions of options.
2. The PEGAsys system can support a total of sixteen
(16) output modules for single-loop and twenty-three
(23) output modules for multi-loop, eight (8) maximum
of any one output module type.
3. Power supply monitors only need an address; they
have no need for an output number.
The output module address is set using the three (3) dip
switches contained on each PCB assembly. Each module
uses different numbered switches for module address as-
signment. The address is set during the installation proce-
dure by placing the switches into the correct position. Refer
to the appropriate figure in Appendix I for the correct mod-
ule and the addressing matrix. For a functional description
of each module, refer to Chapter 3.
The switches would be set for each type of module in or-
der. For example, signal modules would be addressed 1-8
if there were eight (8) in the system; relay modules would
be addressed 1-8 if there were eight (8) in the system and
the same holds true for the remaining modules. The only
exception being the City Tie module—there can only be
one City Tie module in a system at any time.
2-8.5 Registering Output Module Assignments
Output modules are registered into the system configura-
tion through the use of the PCS program. The installer
would configure all modules in the PCS program file and
then upload this file to the system which would then inter-
nally verify the existence of the specified modules. For fur-
ther details on output module registration, refer to the PCS
manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015).
Added RX/TX Modules in the multi-loop systems are au-
tomatically registered by the CCM upon system power-up.
2-8.5.1 LISTING OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENT
All output modules which are programmed into the sys-
tem may be listed with the use of either the owner's or
installer's menu functions.
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the list of module address assignments by typ-
ing the formula 2-6-2. The system will then list all of
the registered output module addresses on the LCD
and send a printout to any attached printer.
July 2003
2-8.6 Addressing RCUs
RCUs refer to all devices which connect and operate from
the RX/TX PC (Power/Communications) Line. These de-
vices include SmartOne smoke detectors, SmartOne heat
detectors, addressable contact input monitors, address-
able output modules (AOs or ASMs) and PALM Orion XT
monitor modules.
Each device has a three-digit numeric address. This ad-
dress is stored in the nonvolatile EEPROM memory of the
device. The device is identified by the CCM by these three
digits, and by a fourth digit which represents the RX/TX
number.
There are two ways to address the RCU (Loop) devices.
1. The RCUs (except PALMs) can be addressed using
the Hand Held Programmer (P/N 74-200013-001). This
optional unit provides a convenient means of address-
ing RCUs without using the CCM. (See Paragraph
3-3.2.1 for instructions on addressing PALMs.)
2. The user may address the devices individually on the
system by performing the procedure listed below.
To address RCUs using the “SET RCU Address” menu
function, each unaddressed RCU must be connected to
the RX/TX PC line one at a time. Perform the following
steps for each RCU:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 2 password.
c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the set RCU address function by typing the for-
mula 3-3-1. Verify that the display reads:
PRESENT LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _
Note: All new addressable devices have an address of
zero (000).
3. Enter the present RCU address and press the
<RETURN> button. The system will display the fol-
lowing:
TARGET LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _
4. Enter the desired address for the RCU and press
<RETURN>. The system will now change the RCU
address if it is different from the previous address.
The 40-character owner location message cannot be en-
tered using the system keypad. The owner's location mes-
sage can only be entered and uploaded into the system by
use of the PCS program .
2-14 76-100016-001

2-8.7 Registering RCUs
Registration is where the device address is joined with the
device information in the system's memory. Device infor-
mation is comprised of: device type, device messages and
device settings.
There are four ways to register the RCU (loop) devices
into the system:
1. The user may register the devices individually in the
system.
2. The user may register all pre-addressed RCUs at once
using the RCU (loop devices) registration function.
3. The user may register all pre-addressed RCUs using
the AutoLearn function, which sets all devices at de-
fault values, and, in turn, any system alarm input acti-
vates all system outputs. If pre-addressed devices are
used, multiple devices can be attached and registered
into the system at one time using either the AutoLearn
or RCU Registration function.
4. The RCUs can also be registered into the system by
using the PCS program. The installer would specify
each RCU to be connected to the system, and then
upload the system configuration file to the system. The
system would then supervise each device specified.
Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015)
for further details on RCU registration.
1032
001-255 = Device Address (registered)
000 = Device Address (unaddressed/
unregistered)
RXTX loop number
1 for single-loop systems,
1-8 for multi-loop systems
Figure 2-7. RCU Registration Screen
Example: RCU 1032 represents device 32 on RX/TX
loop 1.
Connecting an unregistered RCU address to the RX/TX
will result in a "not registered" trouble (TBL NR), indicating
that the control panel has communicated with the device
and identified the device as being unregistered.
To register RCU devices using the register RCU function,
attach all pre-addressed loop devices to the PC line of the
RX/TX module. Power-up the system (if it is not already
running). As the loop devices power up, they will begin to
communicate with the RX/TX module. The CCM will rec-
ognize the loop devices as not registered, and will issue a
trouble message for each non-registered (TBL NR) de-
vice attached. When the register RCU function is enabled,
the CCM will prompt the user to enter a range of loop de-
vice addresses to register as valid system devices. At the
conclusion of the register function, the CCM will display
the total amount of devices registered.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys™
The AutoLearn function works much the same as the reg-
istration function, as it automatically enters the devices
which it can identify into the system's configuration memory.
During both the AutoLearn and RCU Registration proce-
dures, the CCM will automatically register the loop devices
into memory and also set each device to default settings
(e.g., sensitivity levels and input reporting) for the particu-
lar device. The CCM will also set the default operation of
the CCM outputs (MP01, MP02, MP03 and MP04). Any
system alarm received after this time will cause all the CCM
outputs (MP01-MP04) to activate.
Optionally, if the output motherboard and output modules
have been installed, the PCS program will need to be used
to configure the system for use with the output modules.
Procedures for registering output modules are provided in
the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015, see Para-
graph 2-8.4 “Addressing Output Modules”).
2-8.7.1 DETECTOR REGISTRATION
SmartOne smoke and heat detectors would be registered in
the system in the same fashion as the RCUs explained in the
previous section. However, detection device application, the
alarm and pre-alarm levels, and latching or non-latching op-
tions will have to be selected. There are three specific appli-
cations for smoke detector use: Open Area, Open Area (High
Air Flow) and Duct. The smoke and heat detector's pre-alarm
and alarm set points are adjusted only when necessary if the
user desires the set points to be different from the default
values for each detector type.
The detectors will use the default values, unless otherwise
programmed. To adjust the set points for the detectors, refer
to Chapter 5, Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detec-
tor Sensitivities.
The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered
using the system keypad. The owner's location message can
only be entered through the PCS program, and then uploaded
into system memory.
2-8.7.2 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE
REGISTRATION
The addressable contact monitors are registered in the
system in the same fashion as the RCUs explained in the
previous section. The system will, by default, set the re-
sponse of the device activation to alarm. During system
configuration (using the PCS program), the following
choices are allowed: Alarm, Trouble, Abort, Supervisory,
Manual Alarm, Manual Release, WaterFlow or Normal. See
below for the specific contact monitor selections.
Contact monitor RCUs are also registered into the system
through the PCS program. The installer would specify each
contact monitor RCU to be connected to the system and
then upload the system configuration file to the system.
The system would then supervise each device specified.
Refer to the PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for
further details on RCU registration.
2-15 July 2003
PEGAsys™
1: Alarm–Active input initiates an alarm at the central
control panel and is latched in the EOC until the sys-
tem is reset after alarm has cleared.
2: Trouble–Active input initiates a trouble at the central
control panel, but does not latch EOC programming
and will self restore upon deactivation.
3: Abort–Active input initiates an abort condition at the
central control panel. This will delay agent release if
countdown has begun. It does not latch EOC program
and will self-restore upon deactivation. There are four
(4) styles of abort available for the device.
4: Waterflow–Active input initiates a waterflow alarm con-
dition at the central control panel and is latched in EOC
program until reset. Signal outputs will be inhibited from
being silenced.
5: Manual Alarm–Active input initiates a manual alarm
condition at the central control panel, latches in EOC
program until reset.
6: Manual Release–Active input initiates a manual re-
lease condition at the central control panel, causes
instant release of programmed output, latches in EOC
program until reset
7: Normal–Active input initiates a momentary display but
does not latch in EOC program, self-restores.
8: Supervisory–Active input initiates a supervisory event
at the central control panel, but does not latch the EOC,
and will self-restore upon deactivation.
The 40-character owner location message cannot be en-
tered using the system keypad. The owner's location mes-
sage can only be entered by use of the PCS program and
uploaded into system memory.
2-8.7.3 REMOTE CONTROL MODULE
REGISTRATION
The addressable output device (AO or ASM) is registered
in the same fashion as the previous RCUs.
Control modules can also be registered into the system by
using the PCS program. The installer would specify each
output RCU to be connected to the system, upload the
system configuration file to the system and then the sys-
tem would supervise each device specified. Refer to the
PCS manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for further de-
tails on RCU registration.
The 40-character owner location message cannot be en-
tered using the system keypad. The owner's location mes-
sage can only be entered by use of the PCS program and
uploaded into system memory.
2-8.7.4 LISTING ALL REGISTERED RCUs
All RCUs registered in the system can be listed using ei-
ther the owner's or installer's menu function. To list all reg-
istered RCUs:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
July 2003
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the List RCU address function by typing the for-
mula 2-6-1. Verify that the display and any attached
printers list all registered RCU addresses.
2-8.7.5 DE-REGISTERING RCUs
The system provides the capability to remove a single de-
vice or group of devices from the system configuration.
This function removes the device address from the sys-
tem memory but leaves the address in the device intact.
Performing this operation will cause the system to gener-
ate a trouble NR (Not Registered) for any devices which
remain connected to the RX/TX PC line. Removal or dis-
connection of the device(s) from the PC line will clear the
trouble condition(s) in the system.
This function would be used during a system retrofit where
some devices are to be removed from the system tempo-
rarily during a building renovation and then reattached af-
ter renovations are complete. This feature is very efficient
because the device maintains its address information which
speeds device reregistering after the renovations.
To perform the device de-registering operation:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
2. Select the set RCU De-Registration function by typing
the formula 3-3-4. Verify that the display reads:
DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION
DEVICE FROM_ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _
3. Enter the desired RCU address(es) and press return.
The display will show the following to verify the device
de-registration:
DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION
XX DEVICES DE-REGISTERED
4. Verify that the display changes to the device menu af-
ter five seconds. The backspace key can be pressed
to return to the main menu.
5. To reregister RCU devices, perform the procedure
which is outlined Paragraph 2-8.7, Registering RCUs.
2-16 76-100016-001
 PEGAsys™

CHAPTER 3
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3-1 INTRODUCTION 3-2 BLOCK DIAGRAM

This chapter provides a functional description of the de- The PEGAsys system is divided into ten functional blocks
vices/modules used in the PEGAsys system configuration. as follows:
Each functional description covers one of the blocks shown
• Central Control Module
in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.
• Display Module
Channel 1
ATM Network
Driver RS 485
24 Vdc Interface To Networked Control Unit(s)
Module(s) Channel 2
Card
RS 485
RS 485 5 Vdc RS 485
RS 485
Remote
RS 485 Display
Display
24 Vdc Module(s) Module 24
Vdc
Central
24 Vdc Control
Module
AC Receiver/
Transmitter SLC to
Input Power Module
Battery Supply No. 1 RX/TX - CCM (RX/TX) RCUs
Backup Communications (Field Devices)
RS 485

24 Vdc
24 Vdc 24 Vdc AC
Output Output Power Input
RS 485 Motherboard 1 RS 485 Motherboard 2 RS 485 Supply No. 2 Battery
Backup

RS 485 24 Vdc RS 485 24 Vdc

Output Module(s) Output Module(s)

Figure 3-1. Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System

Channel 1
ATM Network
RS 485
Driver Interface To Networked Control Unit(s)
24 Vdc Channel 2
Module(s) Card
RS 485
RS 485 5 Vdc RS 485
RS 485
Remote
RS 485 Display
Display
24 Vdc Module 24
Module(s)
Vdc
Central
24 Vdc Control
RX/TX 1 - CCM SLC 1 to RCUs
Module Communications
AC 24 Vdc RX/TX Module 1
Input Power RX/TX N - CCM
SLC N to RCUs
Multi-Loop Communications
Battery Supply No. 1 RX/TX - CCM
Motherboard 24 Vdc RX/TX Module N
Backup Communications
RS 485
RS-485
24 Vdc Output Module(s)
24 Vdc
RS 485
RS 485
AC
Output 24 Vdc Power Input
Motherboard Supply No. 2 Battery
RS 485 Backup

RS 485 24 Vdc
Output Module(s)

Figure 3-2. Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System

76-100016-001 3-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

• RX/TX Module sion 7X.X firmware and P/N 76-100008-701, networkable,

• Output Modules ORION XT compatible, Version 8X.X firmware) and multi-
loop (P/N 76-100008-600, networkable, Version 7X.X firm-
• RCUs (Field Devices) ware and P/N 76-100008-800, networkable, ORION XT
• Power Supply Module compatible, Version 8X.X firmware). Figure 3-3 contains
the main central processing unit, real-time clock, watch
• Motherboard dog timer and RS-232 serial communication input/output
• Remote Display/Control Modules (Optional) ports. The CCM controls the operation and supervision of
all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys
• ATM Driver Modules (Optional) system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX mod-
• Network Interface Card (Optional) ules, processes the data based on pre-programmed in-
structions and transmits output commands to the output
As described in Paragraph 1-1.2, the system is available modules, field devices and display module(s).
in two configurations: single-loop and multi-loop. The above
devices/modules for both configurations are shown in the The CCM provides two RS-232C serial ports for program-
Overall Functional Block Diagrams, Figures 3-1 and 3-2. ming and monitoring of the PEGAsys system. These ports
Each device/module is described in detail in Paragraph accept six-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. The PCS pro-
3-3. gram is used to interface to the system for programming
purposes. A multi-level password scheme protects the sys-
tem from unauthorized access.
3-3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
The real-time clock provides the CCM with the ability to
The functional descriptions will describe each device or
display the current time and date on the system LCD and
module depicted in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.
control the system with time-based programming.
3-3.1 Central Control Module
Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of
The Central Control Module (CCM) is available in two ver- the system. For example, microprocessor failure, memory
sions: single-loop (P/N 76-100008-501, networkable, Ver- failure, RS-232 port troubles, etcetera.

See Note 1
SOUNDER 1 SOUNDER 2 VOLT FREE RELAYS V/F RELAY
REP 1

REP 2

-
A
+ -
B
+ -
A
+ -
B
+
1 2
NO NC C NO NC C
FAULT
NO NC C Note 1: The trouble relay
contacts are shown in the
TB4 TB5 TB1 TB2 TB3 SKT1
unpowered state.
Note 2: Jumpers JP1-JP4 are
used to configure MP01 to be
signaling (default) or releasing
outputs. See Appendix I for
See Note 2
CCM Reset further details.
JP4 JP3
Button
JP1
SW1

JP2
PORT

JK5
I/O

To Output Modules and

BT1
Power Supplies
RX/TX
PORT

JK2 JK3 JK4

JK1 PLG2

1
TB6 To RX/TX
Loop Controller
SUPPLY
EARTH

24V 5V 0V
FLT

DISP PRINT P.C.

FLT

5V 0V
24V
0V

PORT PORT PORT PLG1 DISPLAY

To External To Remote P.C. For

Printer Programing
24 Vdc From
Power Supply
Processor Display Reset
Port Switch Display Trouble
LED
BUZZER
PLG2

PLG3
SW1

DS1
PRINT PORT
SUPPLY FAULT
EARTH FAULT

24 VDC
0V
PLG2
PLG1
JK2

JK3

TB6
JK1

Display PC Port 24 Vdc from

Port Power Supply
Figure 3-3. Central Control Module, Details

July 2003 3-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

Two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1
and MP2) can be used for signaling devices (horns,
strobes, bells) and allow up to 2.0 Amps of 24 Vdc power.
One of the two outputs is programmed for releasing sole-
noid type suppression equipment (Agent and Sprinkler type
systems).
Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 and
MP4) are on the CCM for controlling building functions
during alarm occurrences. These relay outputs are acti-
vated through the EOC programming which allows sys-
tem inputs to be related to system outputs. Each of these
relays have Form C contacts, rated at 1 A, 30 Vdc.
One non-programmable trouble relay is supplied, which is
normally powered and will transfer on any system trouble,
pre-alarm or complete power-off condition. Form C con-
tact rating is 1 A @ 30 Vdc. See Appendix I for further
installation details.
An event history buffer is provided in the CCM which will
store 1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multi-
loop of system event information and allow the operator to
retrieve this information for review of system operation.
The PCS program provides the ability to download, store
and print all or a portion of the Event History Buffer.
3-3.2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
The RX/TX functions as the hardware and software inter-
face between the loop devices and the CCM. Each installed
RX/TX module continually monitors all addressable de-
vices for alarm and trouble conditions. Each device is ca-
pable of initiating and sending alarm and trouble messages
to the RX/TX module to which it is connected.
The RX/TX receives control requests from the CCM and
establishes communications with the loop devices. The
RX/TX receives status changes from the loop devices and

STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit, with Loop Isolator

24 Vdc
(Red)
24 Vdc from
Power Supply
Zone 2
Loop Loop
Isolator Isolator
RS-232 Port for
Communication
with CCM

Zone 1 Zone 3

See Note

Loop Loop
76-100005-001

Isolator Isolator
RX/TX

1 2 3 4
RET

RET
24V

24V

LOOP ISOLATOR
Mounted to RX/TX
CPU Reset 74-200012-001
PC Line Normal
Loop Isolator RX/TX
CPU Reset for Style 7
(74-200012-001) Note: Each zone can consist of 30 loop devices
PC Line Reset between loop isolators

STYLE 7 Signal Line Circuit

Loop Loop
See Note
Isolator Isolator

Zone 2
Loop Loop
Note: Refer to jumper table in Appendix I Isolator Isolator

STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit

1
2 Zone 1 Zone 3
See Note
3
4

Loop Loop
STYLE 4 Signal Line Circuit Isolator Isolator
1
2
1 2 3 4
3
RET

RET
24V

24V

4 LOOP ISOLATOR
Mounted to RX/TX
74-200012-001

RX/TX

Note: Adjacent loop isolators must be within 20 ft. of a device with wiring in conduit
to be in accordance with NFPA Style 7 requirements.

Figure 3-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details

76-100016-001 3-3 July 2003

PEGAsys™
reports these changes to the CCM. The RX/TX (see Fig-
ure 3-4) is capable of communicating with up to 255 intel-
ligent devices and complies with the Signaling Line Circuit
(SLC) requirements of NFPA-72 Style 4, 6 and 7. Style 4
initiation circuit wiring will permit “T” tapping or branch cir-
cuitry. Style 7 requires the use of isolator devices.
3-3.3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly
The power supply/charger assembly (see Figure 3-5)
(P/N 76-100009-010), is comprised of a PCB mounted on
an AC/DC switching power module. The switching power
supply provides 4 Amps of 24 Vdc power from the 120/
240 Vac input power. The PCB assembly is a micropro-
cessor-based unit which provides the system with:
• Battery charging (up to 99 AH) and supervision
(low voltage battery cutoff is at 19 Vdc)
• AC power supervision
• 24 Vdc supervision
• Battery load test
• 24 Vdc ground fault detection (+/-)
NOTE: SOLDER A 0 OHM, 1/4 W
RESISTOR ACROSS W5 WHEN
USING 220 VAC POWER.
Figure 3-5. Power Supply/Charger Assembly Details
July 2003
• Trouble relay that transfers upon any power sup-
ply trouble or power off condition (relay shown in
the non-powered state)
• Two auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs (programmable for
switched or non-switched configurations)
The auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs are rated at 1.5 Amp each
and can be used to power four-wire type detection devices
such as smoke, flame and gas detectors.
Note: Outputs must be sized properly to stay within out-
put current limits.
The power supply/charger assembly is addressable and
communicates with the CCM over the RS-485 communi-
cations bus.
The power supply/charger assembly provides terminal con-
nections for an auxiliary power module. This module comes
with two different wiring harnesses, as follows:
• P/N 76-100009-002. Supplied with a 36-inch har-
ness that is meant to connect a main power sup-
ply/charger assembly to the auxiliary power mod-
ule in the main cabinet.
CAUTION: THE VOLTAGE FOR THE TWO BATTERIES IN SERIES MUST
BE GREATER THAN 22 VDC BEFORE CONNECTION TO THE PANEL.
TWO (2) SEALED
LEAD-ACID
BATTERIES
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC
3-4 76-100016-001
 PEGAsys™

• P/N 76-100009-003. Supplied with an 8-inch har- The RX/TX modules communicate to the CCM via the multi-
ness to mount a main power supply/charger as- plexer, located on the motherboard. The CCM identifies each
sembly to an auxiliary power module in a expan- of the installed RX/TX modules by the RS-232 connection on
sion enclosure. the motherboard. Table 3-1 lists each RX/TX communication
connection located on the motherboard and the loop number
The addition of an auxiliary power module to the main
and addresses assigned to the connected module. See Ap-
power supply/charger assembly will provide an additional
pendix I for installation details.
4 Amps of current and make the total available current 8
Amps for this assembly. The system can support up to Table 3-1. Multi-Loop Motherboard Connectors
eight (8) main power supply/charger assemblies with the
capability of adding an auxiliary power module to each one C ON N E C T OR L OOP AD D R E S S
to provide a maximum available current of 64 Amps. Each JP1 1 1001-1255
additional power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-
010) will need to have a separate address to operate in JP2 2 2001-2255
the system. The auxiliary power module shares the same
JP3 3 3001-3255
address as the main power supply/charger assembly that
it is connected to. See Appendix I for further installation JP4 4 4001-4255
details.
JP5 5 5001-5255
3-3.4 Multi-Loop Motherboard
JP6 6 6001-6255
The multi-loop motherboard assembly, P/N 76-100017-001,
JP7 7 7001-7255
is an assembly which can accept any combination of nine
(9) modules consisting of up to eight (8) RX/TX modules JP8 8 8001-8255
and provide connections for up to seven (7) output mod-
ule circuit board assemblies (see Figure 3-6). The ML 3-3.5 Signal Output Module
motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the back of the The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of
main system enclosure. It distributes the system 24 Vdc eight (8) Signal Output modules, shown in Figure 3-7, thus
power, CCM-RX/TX communications and output bus com- providing thirty-two (32) possible signal circuits. Each Sig-
munications to the output modules. The output bus com- nal Output module is equipped with supervised 24 Vdc
munications are provided by an RJ-12 (flat phone cable) outputs, which can operate as Class B, Style “Y” or Class
style connection. A single RJ-12 connection connects the A, Style “Z” indicating circuits. The module will allow for
ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX communications. four (4) Class B or two (2) Class A or a mix of two (2) Class
The 24 Vdc is provided by the system power supply via a B and one (1) Class A. Each circuit is supervised for open,
two-conductor wiring harness connected to a terminal block short and ground fault. Individual outputs can be isolated
(TB11) and is distributed through terminal blocks via the system operator menu.
(TB1-TB8) for connection to RX/TXs. The 24 Vdc, pro-
vided by the system power supply via two-conductor wir-
ing connected to terminal block TB-9, is distributed through
receptacles for powering output modules.
JP10

RS-232

TB11
RET
+24V

TB8 TB7 TB6 TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 TB1 JP9

RS-485

TB10
W1 JP8 JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4 JP3 JP2 JP1 COM TBL
COM ALM
SIG GND
485A
485B
RET
+24V
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 TB9

Note: If the motherboard is the last device on the RS-485 bus, the W1 jumper remains in place.
If the motherboard is not the last device on the RS-485 bus, then it must be removed.

Figure 3-6. Multi-Loop Motherboard, Details

76-100016-001 3-5 July 2003

PEGAsys™
2 CLASS A, STYLE "Z”
5
-
CIRCUIT 1
6
-
10K EOR
7
+
8
+
9
-
Reset Switch CIRCUIT 3
Trouble LED { Module Address
Assignment 10K EOR
10
-

76-100003-001
11

SIGNAL AUD
+
12
+

See Note 2

Auxiliary Power
{ 1 CLASS A, STYLE "Z" AND
2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y"
5
NotUsed -
CIRCUIT 1
TB1 6
-
10K EOR
7
Sounder Circuits 1-4 +
8
+
9
-
10
CIRCUIT 3
-
10K EOR 10K EOR CIRCUIT 4
11
+
12
+

Note 1: See Appendix I for Jumper

Configuration (W1-W8). 2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y" AND
4 CLASS B, STYLE "Y" 1 CLASS A STYLE "Z”
2: Cut Jumpers W9 & W10 when
5
Auxiliary Power Input is used to -
5
-
remove module from motherboard CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 1
6 6
power bus. - -
10K EOR 10K EOR CIRCUIT 2 10K EOR 10K EOR CIRCUIT 2
7 7
+ +
3: Only 8 of this Type Module can 8 8
+ +
be used on the system. Refer 9 9
to Section 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, - -
10 CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 3
for other limitations. -
10
-
10K EOR 10K EOR CIRCUIT 4 10K EOR
11 11
+ +
12 12
+ +

Figure 3-7. Signal Output Module, Details

The alarm output circuits are polarity reversing type, rated
for 24 Vdc signaling devices up to 2.0 Amp maximum per
circuit. Careful consideration of alarm strobe in-rush cur-
rents has been made to help avoid any potential problems
with the increased power requirements in support of the
wide range of the ADA/UL 1971 signaling appliances in
the marketplace. See Appendix I for installation details.
Power for normal standby and alarm operation derives from
either of two sources:
• Primary supply up to its capacity, or
• Auxiliary power supply input
Provision for hardwire input of auxiliary power has been
made through the use of hardwire connections between
the auxiliary power supply and terminals 1 and 2 of the
terminal block of the signal module. Output circuits are
listed for use in power limited applications.
Each circuit can be individually programmed via the PCS
program for Continuous, Pulsed 60 or 120 BPM (March-
Time) or Coded (Temporal Pattern) operation. Relation
between each signal output and its input source is defined
by the panel EOC logic program. In Walk Test mode, the
signal output circuit(s) sounds the test signal (if pro-
grammed properly). The walk test signal is a 1.0 second
pulse, sounded once as each device is activated.
3-3.6 Relay Output Module
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of
eight (8) Auxiliary Relay Output cards for up to thirty-two
(32) relays . Each Auxiliary Relay Output card (shown in
Figure 3-8) is equipped with four (4) Form C, dry contact
relay outputs. The ability to isolate an individual relay out-
put is accomplished through the system operator menu.
The auxiliary relays are rated for 2.0 Amp @ 30 Vdc and
1.0 Amp @ 120 Vac. See Appendix I for further installation
details.
Each relay output can be individually programmed via the
PCS program for operation. Relation between each relay
output and its input source is defined by the panel EOC

July 2003 3-6 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

logic program. In Walk Test mode, the relay output circuit(s) Each Agent Release Output Module is equipped with a
will not operate when the input device(s) under test is ac- 24 V, supervised output which is programmable for sole-
tivated. noid-type discharge controls. The installer must select dis-
charge control type required during hardware and software
configuration programming. The circuit is supervised for
open or ground fault conditions. The ability for individual
release output isolate is provided through the system menu.
Each card is equipped with supervised signaling outputs
for three (3) Class B, Style “Y” 24 Vdc polarity reversing
76-100004-001

type indicating circuits. Each signal circuit is supervised

RELAY

for open, short and ground fault conditions. The ability for
individual output isolation is provided through the system
menus. Careful consideration of alarm strobe in-rush cur-
rents has been made.
The agent release output circuit is rated for 24 Vdc control
devices. Each release output can supervise and activate
up to two (2) solenoid control heads.
Table 3-2 details all devices approved for operation with
the agent release module.
Table 3-2. Approved Release Output Devices
Note: A maximum of 8 Relay Output Modules can be used on the system.
Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations. Manufacturer Solenoids

486500 and
Figure 3-8. Relay Output Module, Details Kidde-Fenwal
48650001
3-3.7 Agent Release Output Module Kidde-Fenwal 890181
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of eight Kidde-Fenwal 897494
(8) agent release output modules, which provide up to eight
(8) possible release circuits and twenty-four (24) signal out- Kidde-Fenwal 899175
puts on these modules. (See Figure 3-9.) Kidde-Fenwal 895630

Kidde-Fenwal 81-100000-001

FM Groups A, B, D, E and G
Various Manufacturers
Sprinkler Solenoids
Module Address
Reset Switch
Trouble LED
Assignment Power for standby and alarm operation of release and sig-
naling outputs shall derive from one of two sources:
76-100001-001
RELEASE

• Primary supply up to its capacity, or

See Note 2
• Auxiliary power supply input.

Auxiliary Power
1 } Input of auxiliary power is hard-wired through terminals 1 and
2 on the module's terminal block. Output circuits are Listed
Release Circuits
for use in Power Limited applications. All signaling power is
TB1
fully regulated.
Signal Circuits

12
Note 1: A maximum of 8 of this type module can be used in the system.
Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations.
2: W1 and W2 must be cut when the auxiliary power input is used.
Figure 3-9. Agent Release Output Module, Details
3-3.8 City Tie Module
The City Tie Module (Figure 3-10) provides connection and
operation for Local Energy or Shunt-type Master Boxes and
Reverse Polarity styles of output. The output type is selected
by choosing which terminals terminate the field wiring. The
module has an amber LED to signify disconnect status. The
ability for individual output isolate is provided through the sys-
tem menus.

76-100016-001 3-7 July 2003

PEGAsys™

System Status Display

AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE SYSTEM

SILENCE
ACKNOWLEDGE
ALARM SUPERVISORY
SYSTEM
SCROLL
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET

1 2 3 4 5
76-100002-001

R 6 7 8 9 0
CITY TIE

Figure 3-11. RDCM Keypad

3-3.10 ATM Series Driver Modules
The ATM Series Driver Modules permit third-party graphi-
cal annunciators and large numbers of auxiliary relays to
be used with the PEGAsys Control Unit.
Refer to the ATM Series Installation and Operation Manual,
Part Number 06-236179-002, for a complete description
of the ATM Series Driver Modules.

S2 S1 LK17

LK32

ATM-L/R
LK16 LK15
Out B 16 32
LK31 LK30
Out A 15 31
In B LK14 LK13 14 30
Note: Only 1 City Tie Module can be connected to the system. In A 13
12
LK29 LK28 29
28
W1 LK12 LK11 11 27
10 LK27 LK26 26

LK10 LK9 9 25
Figure 3-10. City Tie Module, Details +24 V
Com
8
7
LK25 LK24 24
23
PS Flt LK8 LK7
6 22
Earth Gnd 5 LK23 LK22
21
Local Energy-Type Output: Monitored output for trip cir- Trouble Lamp Test
LK6 LK5 4
3 LK21 LK20
20
19
A 2 18
cuit wiring and Master Box coil status (Set/Unset), current B Sup.
Sil. Out
Com
Ack
LK4 LK3 1
LK19 LK18
17
Pre Alm Reset
limited at 550 mA, 24 Vdc. Monitored for open, short and Alarm
Pwr On
Silence
Drill
LK2 LK1

ground fault.
Shunt-Type Output: Unsupervised contact rated at 5.0 Figure 3-12. ATM Module
Amp, 24 Vdc resistive.
3-3.11 Network Interface Card
Reverse Polarity-Type Output: Unsupervised output for
trip circuit wiring only, current limited at 100 mA, 24 Vdc. The Network Interface Card allows multiple PEGAsys
Control Units to be combined into an integrated, peer-to-
Reverse Polarity output circuits are listed for use in Power peer network for annunciation, event output control, and
Limited applications. See Appendix I for further installa- operator intervention.
tion details.
Refer to Appendix J for a complete discussion of the
The City Tie Module will operate during the PEGAsys PEGAsys Network Interface Card and system networking
"FailSoft” mode. Any system alarm will cause the output to capabilities.
transfer. NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
CAT. NO. 74-200036-001

In Walk Test mode, the city notification outputs shall be J1 DS4 DS2 DS3 DS1

disabled. In addition, the output has provisions for manual

N2 N1 I2 I1
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1
C26
1

disable or isolate through the system menu. The initiation D

TB4 TB2 TB3 TB1
CR3

U12
CR2 K2 CR1 K1
K3

of a walk test will create a system trouble, causing the city C27
1
R23

U13
RV11

tie output to transfer to the trouble state. U11

RV12

K4 R46
R45 C12 GND
RV6 RV8 RV2 TP1
RV10

+5
RV4 RV9 RV3 C20 U2
TP2

3-3.9 Remote Display Control Modules

1
C23

RV5 RV7 RV1 I1

E1

Y1
R24

R10
E8

TP3
+ N1

C13 TP4
R25

N2
R6
R5

R3
E7

E3
E6
R4

E5

E2
E4

U7 C4
+

C3
+

TP5

The remote display control modules permit system events 1 I2

R14

C5 TP6
R22 1
C2

U3
R36
R2

U18

to be displayed, and operator intervention to be accom- R20 1 1 U5 C11 C14

C18
R13
R21

R41
R40 1 U4

plished, from more than one location in a facility.

U20 U21
1 C16 1 1
U19 1
R44 R12 R19
C1

U14 R17 U16 R32

C10
R43

C25 R29
R33
R15

1 R1 C22 R34
C9 U17 U10 U9
Q4 C8 1

Refer to Appendix L for a complete discussion of the Q3

R7
U15

Q1 1 1 1 1
U8
+
R42

R26 R31 R38

C7

PEGAsys Remote Display Control Module and the Remote

Q2
1 R28
C15 C24
U6 R18 R27 C17
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

Display Module. (See Figure 3-11.)

Figure 3-13. Network Interface Card

July 2003 3-8 76-100016-001


3-3.12 Field Devices
The SmartOne Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm Devices pro-
vides the PEGAsys control system with smoke and heat
detection as well as the necessary monitoring and control
functions required by advanced fire alarm systems. Each
of the SmartOne devices features an intrinsic micropro-
cessor with 4K of nonvolatile memory. Each device con-
stantly monitors its surrounding environment and makes
decisions in response to that information. The devices then
report status as required to the control panel. Each loop
device communicates with the RX/TX module over the PC
(power/communications) line.
This “Distributed Intelligence” architecture allows each loop
device to make decisions within the monitored area. This
unique utilization of processing power makes possible a
system of loop devices with greater capacity and flexibility
than any typical addressable device system with central-
ized processing.
Each SmartOne device contains a status LED which blinks
in various patterns to indicate device status. The blink rates
and associated status levels are as follows:
Blink Rate Operation Status
9 Second Rate Normal mode
2 Second Rate Alarm (activated)
Off (not blinking) Trouble condition
The following three paragraphs describe each type of avail-
able detector. A typical detector is shown in Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14. Typical Detector
3-3.13 SmartOne Ionization Detector
The SmartOne Ionization smoke detector provides true dis-
tributed intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-based
smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. Model CPD-7052
is a dual chamber, analog, ionization type detector, which
senses both visible and invisible smoke. A unique sensing
chamber permits 360° of smoke entry and response. Each
detector is electronically addressable and can be fully field
programmed. Calibration, device address, pre-alarm and
alarm sensitivity set points and drift compensation algo-
rithm are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory.
SmartOne Ionization detectors have an unobtrusive low
profile look, and are available using the following:
• Model CPD 7052 SmartOne Ionization Detector:
P/N 70-402001-100
76-100016-001
PEGAsys™
3-3.14 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector
The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detectors provide true
distributed intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-
based smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. Model
PSD-7152 is an analog, photoelectric type detector, which
responds to a broad range of smoldering and flaming type
fires. A unique sensing chamber permits 360° of smoke
entry and response. Each detector is electronically addres-
sable and can be fully field programmed. Calibration, de-
vice address and pre-alarm and alarm sensitivity set points
are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory.
SmartOne photoelectric detectors have an unobtrusive low
profile look, and are available using the following:
• Model PSD 7152 SmartOne Photoelectric Detec-
tor: P/N 71-402001-100
3-3.15 SmartOne Heat Detector
The SmartOne heat detectors provide true distributed in-
telligence, addressable, microprocessor-based heat de-
tection to the PEGAsys system. Model THD-7252 is an
analog fixed temperature, thermistor-type detector, which
does not respond to rate of rise conditions until its pro-
grammed set point is met. Unique algorithms are used to
compensate for heat rise without problems associated with
false alarms due to elevated rates of rise in ambient tem-
perature.
A unique sensing chamber permits 360° of heat entry and
response. Each detector is electronically addressable and
can be fully field programmed. Calibration, device address,
pre-alarm and alarm sensitivity set point are stored in each
detector's nonvolatile memory.
SmartOne Heat detectors have an unobtrusive low-profile
look, and are available using the following:
• Model THD 7252 SmartOne Heat Detector:
P/N 70-404001-100
3-3.16 Addressable Contact Input Device
The PEGAsys Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) al-
lows an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire
alarm devices, such as water flow and tamper switches,
to the PEGAsys system. The contact monitor is also used
to interface to the Manual Alarm, Manual Release and Abort
Stations. The addressable contact monitor device is pro-
grammable to report the following events: Alarm (default),
Trouble, Manual Alarm, Waterflow Alarm, Manual Release,
Abort, Supervisory and Normal (Silent input). Its default
setting is Alarm when programmed using the AutoLearn
function. (See Figure 3-15.)
The unit includes a connection for an optional status LED,
which allows the device to indicate its current operating
status. In normal standby mode, the LED will flash every
nine (9) seconds; in trouble condition, the LED will be ex-
tinguished; and when activated, the LED will flash every
two (2) seconds.
3-9 July 2003
PEGAsys™

• Addressable Contact Input Device (NO): 3-3.18 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
P/N 70-407008-001.
The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting
• Addressable Contact Input Device (NC): particles of combustion in air handling systems. Upon
P/N 70-407008-002. smoke detection, the system can be programmed to con-
Typical N.O. Initiating
trol a variety of devices such as HVAC fans and power
Devices shutdown which can prevent unnecessary damage to a
facility.
The duct housing accepts either the PSD-7152 or CPD-
7052 smoke detectors. A transparent Lexan® cover over
(+) (+) EOL the detection chamber allows visual inspection of the duct
PC Line (-) (-) PC Line (10K Resistor)
In Out detector chamber and the internal smoke detector status.
Typical N.C. Supervisory
Devices
Sampling of the air in the duct is accomplished through
Remote LED
(Optional)
the use of sampling tubes, which extend into the HVAC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
duct. (See Figure 3-17.)
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED

• Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing:

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:

ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED

MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

ASHLAND, MA 01721
SmartOne TM

P/N 70-403001-100
INSTRUCTIONS
MODEL AI, N/O

SEE INSTALLATION

06-235578-001

EOL
400 MAIN ST.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (10K Resistor)
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
PC PC PC PC SW SWLEDLED • Model DH-2000 CPDI Air Duct Housing with Ion De-
tector: P/N 70-403001-052
Figure 3-15. Addressable Contact Input Device • Model DH-2000 PSDI Air Duct Housing with Photo
Detector: P/N 70-403001-152
3-3.17 Addressable Relay Output Device
Refer to DH-2000 Installation Manual (P/N 06-235398-001)
The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001) for further details.
provides the PEGAsys system with a Form C, dry contact
ENCLOSURE
interface for remote control applications. The device con-
END PLUG
nects directly to the RX/TX multiplex loop and contains an
SPDT relay for control of auxiliary equipment. The device
can be activated through the system EOC or RTC pro- INLET TUBE
(SUPPLY)
gramming. Its default operation programming is done dur-
ing the AutoLearn function.
OR
CTCT
DU TE L0
The unit includes an intrinsic status LED, which allows the DE DE 0
MHO-20
D
device to indicate its current operating status. In normal
standby mode, the LED will flash every nine (9) seconds;
EXHAUST TUBE
in trouble condition, the LED will be extinguished; and in (MOLDED INTO

activated condition, the LED will flash every two (2) sec- ENCLOSURE)

onds. ( See Figure 3-16.) MTG. SCREW DETECTOR

AND O-RING VIEW PORT
• Addressable Relay Output Device:
DETECTOR HEAD
P/N 70-408004-001 ION OR PHOTO

Form C contact rated at: N/O 7 COVER

0.6 A @ 120 Vac COM
6 Field
2.0 A @ 30 Vdc (resistive) Connections
1.0 A @ 30 Vdc (inductive) N/C 5 Figure 3-17. DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
3-3.19 Loop Isolator Devices
(+) (+) The SmartOne series of loop devices offer optional loop
PC Line PC Line
In
(-) (-)
Out isolation, which protects the loop from wire-to-wire short
conditions (NFPA 72, Style 7). The isolators will open the
loop between two isolators in the presence of a short cir-
7 6 5
cuit condition, thus allowing the remainder of the loop to
4 3 2 1
N/O COM N/C (+) (-) (+) (-)
PC PC PC PC
operate normally. However, a trouble indication for the de-
vices affected by the isolation will be created on the panel.
TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED
TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
TM

FOR SERVICE SEND TO:

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-408004-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721

The isolators will return to normal operation when the short

SmartOne

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION

06-235577-001
MODEL AO

400 MAIN ST.

condition has been removed from the affected wires. (See

Figures 3-18, 3-19 and 3-20.)

Figure 3-16. Addressable Relay Output Device

July 2003 3-10 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

The loop isolators are offered in three package styles:
• Stand-alone style. Housed in a single gang elec-
trical box arrangement.
• 6-inch Detector Base Mount. Allows the unit to be
mounted behind a smoke detector in the 6-inch
detector base.
• Direct mount. Mounts directly onto the RX/TX mod-
ule.
The single gang mount unit includes intrinsic status LEDs
which allow the device to indicate in which direction the
short condition is being detected. In normal standby mode,
the LED will be extinguished and in activated condition,
the LED will be on continuously.
3-3.20 PEGAsys Addressable Loop Module (PALM)
Used in conjunction with an ORION™ XT, the PEGAsys
Addressable Loop Module permits direct connection of a
High-Sensitivity Smoke Detector (HSSD) to the signaling
line circuit of the PEGAsys Control Unit. Detailed informa-
tion about the PALM can be found in the ORION XT instal-
lation, operation and maintenance manual, P/N
06-236005-401. (See Figure 3-21.)
The PALM allows an HSSD to be monitored like a
SmartOne initiating device. Both pre-alarm and alarm sig-
nals are reported.
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721

• Loop Isolator RX/TX mount: P/N 74-200012-001

• Loop Isolator Stand-alone (Single Gang):
P/N 74-200012-002
• Loop Isolator 6-inch detector base mount:
P/N 74-200012-004
SHORT-2 SHORT-1

J1
Figure 3-21. PALM Interface Module for
LOOP ISOLATOR

DS2 DS1
ORION XT HSSD
RX/TX

Underwriters The ORION XT HSSD is configured via a computer run-

R Laboratories Inc. R

LISTED ning ORION Configuration Software (OCS), Version 2.0.

REFER TO All configuration data and smoke history is stored in the
INSTALLATION MANUAL
P/N 74-200016-001 ORION XT.
FOR MODULE INSTALL. KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
PROCEDURES ASHLAND, MA 01721
OCS may also be used to set the PALM RX/TX loop ad-
dress. However, if the address is set in this fashion, it must
Figure 3-18. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount then be 'Registered' at the PEGAsys CCM. PALM loop
addresses may also be set from the CCM (default setting
is 1000) in the same fashion as other loop modules.
Note: PALM addresses cannot be set via the hand-held
programmer (P/N 74-200013-001).
3-3.21 Addressable AlarmLine Module
The Addressable AlarmLine Module (AAM) permits an
AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the
PEGAsys Control Unit. Refer to Appendix M for a full de-
scription of this Module. (See Figure 3-22.)
Figure 3-19. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone

TM

Underwriters
R Laboratories
LISTED

Figure 3-20. Loop Isolator, 6-inch Detector Base Mount

Figure 3-22. Addressable AlarmLine Module

76-100016-001 3-11 July 2003

PEGAsys™

3-3.22 Addressable Signal/Sounder Module

The Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) permits
notification appliances to be controlled via commands is-
sued from the PEGAsys Control Unit’s signaling line cir-
cuit. The ASM is designed to mount in a standard electrical
box.
Refer to Appendix K for additional details on the Address-
able Signal/Sounder Module. (See Figure 3-23.)
AUXILIARY KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MODE ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
P1=2&3 CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
S1=1&2 ON INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
A B A B PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITED
PC LINE ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED

TM
DEVICE
AUX./AUDIO MODE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _
SETTINGS
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM)
AUX. IN TROUBLE OUTPUT CKT.
+ - + - CKT. + - - + UL R

AUDIO
MODE
P1=1&2 FM
S1=3 ON APPROVED

Figure 3-23. Addressable Signal/Sounder Module

July 2003 3-12 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

CHAPTER 4
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

4. Ensure the following LEDs are momentarily lit:

4-1 INTRODUCTION
AC POWER ALARM
This chapter contains maintenance instructions for the PRE-ALARM SYSTEM TROUBLE
PEGAsys™. These procedures should be accomplished SUPERVISORY SILENCE
on a scheduled basis. In the event that system problems
4-3.2 Loop Device Test
are found during the performance of a procedure, refer to
Chapter 5 for corrective action. Note: This test has a pass or fail result. It will not acti-
vate alarm outputs on the system. All system out-
4-2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE puts must be isolated prior to running this test
procedure.
The scheduled maintenance of the system should be per-
formed at an established interval. The interval that the main- The PEGAsys system provides a unique detector test func-
tenance procedures are performed should not exceed any tion, which allows a user to initiate a test of the detection
imposed regulations (NFPA 72 or local codes). devices through the use of the system menus and verify
that the detection device(s) is operating as intended. The
test actually stimulates the detection chamber of the de-
4-3 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES vice and verifies the response from the device. The CCM
The following paragraphs outline general scheduled main- will report a result of the test for each device tested.
tenance procedures to be performed on an as-necessary The step-by-step procedure to perform the loop device test
basis. follows:
4-3.1 Lamp Test Note: Addressable output modules and PALM modules
This test allows the user to check the system display LEDs. cannot be tested with this procedure.
The step-by-step procedure to perform the lamp test fol- 1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
lows:
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. reads:
c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵ 1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
reads: 3:SET 4:TEST
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST 2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display
3:SET 4:TEST reads:
2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
reads: 3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES 3. Press the number two (2) key. Verify that the display
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more reads:
3. Press the number one (1) key. Verify that the display START DEVICE TEST
reads: TEST DEVICES FROM _ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _
***LAMP TEST*** 4. Enter the device address or range of device addresses
***VERSION XX.X*** to be tested, and then press the return button.
Where XX.X corresponds to the CCM Firmware 5. Verify the display scrolls through each selected ad-
Version. dress and reads as below:
START DEVICE TEST
TESTING (Device Address #)

76-100016-001 4-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

6. When the device testing is completed the display will with a time and date stamp. The operator can then print
read: out all walk test results for review.
TEST COMPLETED The walk test feature can be deactivated two ways: the
(Address #) TEST (PASSED or FAILED) service person can deactivate it through the user menus,
7. Press the <SCROLL> button to read the status of each or the walk test function will time out after ten (10) minutes
device tested. of non-activation (this ensures system response if the ser-
vice person is called away for an extended period of time).
4-3.3 Battery Test
Note: When the walk test is active, the panel will annun-
This test allows the user to activate a battery test to verify ciate a trouble condition.
battery capacity. The step-by-step procedure to perform
the battery test follows: 4-3.4.1 WALK TESTING DETECTORS
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: Place the system in walk test, as described in Paragraph
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: 4-3.4.2. To place a detector into alarm, perform the appli-
cable procedure below:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
• Smoke Detectors–When testing SmartOne® smoke
b. Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. detectors, use a "punk-stick" or "cotton wick" to gen-
erate smoke. Apply smoke to the detector for a mini-
c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵
mum of ten (10) seconds. When a sufficient amount
reads:
of smoke has entered the device, the control panel
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST will respond with an alarm. The status LED of the de-
3:SET 4:TEST tector will flash at a two (2) second rate during the
2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display alarm period. Aerosol smoke simulation may be used
reads: if acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and
if the product is used as directed in the instructions.
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
• Heat Detectors–When testing SmartOne heat detec-
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
tors, use of a low powered heat gun is acceptable.
3. Press the number three (3) key. Verify that the display Heat the detector for a minimum of ten (10) seconds.
reads: When a sufficient amount of heat has been detected
BATTERY TEST by the detector, the control panel will respond with an
BATTERY TEST ON PS*_ _ alarm indication. The status LED of the detector will
flash at a two (2) second rate during the alarm period.
4. Enter the power supply address which the batteries
Take care during the heating of the detector to avoid
are connected to. Verify the display reads:
overheating the plastic housing. Maintain a minimum
BATTERY TEST of one (1) foot between the detector and the heat gun
TEST ACTIVATED ON PS(_ _) nozzle. Use of open flame devices is not recommended
5. Upon the completion of the test the display will read: as discoloration of the plastic housing is likely, which
in turn, creates a potentially hazardous practice.
TEST ON PS(_ _) COMPLETED
>_>_ _._V 4-3.4.2 WALK TEST PROCEDURE
6. Verify that the voltage is within allowable tolerances. The step-by-step procedure to perform the walk test is as
follows:
4-3.4 Walk Test
1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
The PEGAsys system provides a one person walk test
function. This allows the service person to enable a group a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads:
of devices for walk test, then proceed through the installa- PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
tion activating the specified devices. The system will re-
spond to each activation with a short burst of the b. Type in the Level 2 password.
programmed signal circuits. The related signal circuit will c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵
only be pulsed if it has been configured for the Walk Test reads:
feature when defining it in the PCS software.
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
During the system installation/configuration via PCS, the 3:SET 4:TEST
installer needs to enable each signal circuit installed in the
2. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display
system for “Walk Test”, if desired. The system's signal out-
reads:
puts default to walk test disabled. When walk test is acti-
vated and carried out, the system enters each activation 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more

July 2003 4-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

3. Press the <SCROLL> button. Verify that the display 4. Press the <SCROLL> button. Verify that the display
reads: reads:
4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TEST 4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TEST
4. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display 5. Press the number five (5) key. Verify that the display
reads: reads:
1:START WALK TEST 2:STOP WALK TEST ALARM SIMULATION TEST
5. Press the number one (1) key. Verify that the display DETECTOR ADDRESS _ _ _ _
reads: 6. Type in the selected device address and then press
START DEVICE WALK TEST the return key. Verify that the display reads:
WALK TEST STARTED ON LOOP( _ _) ALARM SIMULATION TEST
6. After completion of the walk test, press the number 1:ACTIVATE 2:DE-ACTIVATE
two (2) key to disable the walk test mode. 7. Press the number one (1) key and then the return key.
4-3.5 Alarm Simulation Test (AST) Verify that the system responds as programmed.
8. Press the <ACKLDGE> button to acknowledge the
The PEGAsys system provides a feature that allows the alarm.
system installer/inspector to verify the actual output op-
eration in relation to the input(s) that are programmed to 9. Deactivate the AST programming as follows:
activate the output of interest. The service person would a. Repeat steps 2 through 8.
enable the AST function for a particular input and the sys-
↵).
b. Press number two (2) key and then return (↵
tem would operate the output(s) as it is programmed in
the Event Output Control program. The system will respond
with an alarm condition when the AST feature is enabled. 4-4 DISARMING AND REARMING RELEASE
The user would have to disable the AST when output op- CIRCUITS
eration has been verified. The disarming and rearming procedures which follow must
! WARNING
be performed when testing the PEGAsys system. Prior to
proceeding, be sure the notes below from NFPA 72, Chap-
Any outputs that are controlling critical ter 10, are understood.
processes or agent releasing should be
physically disconnected from the process or Note: IMPORTANT-
agent container to avoid unwanted shutdowns 1. "Testing personnel shall be familiar with the spe-
and/or agent releases. When the AST function cific arrangement and operation of the suppres-
is enabled, the pre-programmed outputs for the sion system(s) and releasing function(s) and be
activated input(s) will activate. cognizant of the hazards associated with inadvert-
4-3.5.1 AST PROCEDURE ent system discharge."
The step-by-step procedure to perform the AST follows: 2. "Occupant notification shall be required whenever
a fire alarm system configured for releasing ser-
1. Be sure to observe the above warning.
vice is being serviced or tested."
2. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows:
3. "Discharge testing of suppression systems shall
a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: not be required by this code. Suppression systems
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD shall be secured from inadvertent actuation, in-
cluding disconnection of releasing solenoids/elec-
b. Type in the Level 2 password.
tric actuators, closing of valves, other actions, or
c. ↵) key. Verify that the display
Press the return (↵ combinations thereof, as appropriate for the spe-
reads: cific system, for the duration of the fire system test-
ing."
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST 4. "Testing shall include verification that the releas-
3. Press the number four (4) key. Verify that the display ing circuits and components energized or actuated
reads: by the fire alarm system are electrically supervised
and operate as intended on alarm."
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more 5. "Suppression systems and releasing components
shall be returned to their normal condition upon
completion of system testing."

76-100016-001 4-3 July 2003

PEGAsys™

4-4.1 Disarming Release Circuits

4-6 POWERING UP THE SYSTEM
Perform the following step-by-step procedure prior to sys-
tem testing. 4-6.1 Power-Up Procedure
1. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu 1. Ensure that all control heads or solenoids are discon-
(refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1). nected from the storage containers to prevent un-
wanted discharge or activation.
! WARNING
2. If the system has been powered down, energize the
Use safety precautions when removing system by performing the following steps:
solenoids to prevent unwanted discharge or
activation. a. Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON.
Verify that the display reads "Main Processor
2. Physically remove the control heads or solenoids at Power On". Ensure that the audible device is buzz-
the storage containers. ing continuously.
! WARNING b. Press the display module reset switch. Verify that
The suppression system is now fully disarmed the audible device is silenced.
from all automatic activation and, in some
c. Verify that the display reads as follows:
cases, all manual activation.
3. The system can now be tested without the risk of an MAIN PROCESSOR
inadvertent release of agent. POWER ON

4-4.2 Arming Release Circuits d. After ten (10) seconds, verify that the display reads
as follows:
Perform the following step-by-step procedure upon comple-
tion of system testing. RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON
RXTX1
1. Verify that all control heads or solenoids are discon-
nected from storage containers. Note: The RX/TX message will repeat itself for each RX/
2. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu TX module in the system while the system initial-
(refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1). izes itself. This initialization can take up to 90 sec-
onds.
3. Ensure the system is free of any alarms to prevent
unwanted discharge or activation. e. Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indi-
4. Reconnect the control heads or solenoids at the cators are lit.
storage containers. f. Connect the backup batteries to the power supply
5. De-isolate agent release circuit(s). in accordance to the procedure in Chapter 7.
6. The system is now in full operation in accordance with g. Press the <ACKLDGE> button. After approxi-
system programming. mately one minute the display for each RX/TX will
momentarily read:
4-5 POWERING DOWN THE SYSTEM RXTX "N" NON-MONITORING TROUBLE
4-5.1 Power-Down Procedure OFF
The procedure to power-down the system is as follows: Note: "N" will sequentially correspond to each RX/TX in
the system.
1. Ensure that the panel does not have any active alarms
to prevent unwanted discharge or activation. Also en- h. Verify the display reads the correct time and date.
sure that any supervisory or trouble events have been If the incorrect time is displayed, perform step 2.i.
acknowledged.
i. Set time and date as follows:
! CAUTION aa. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display
If alarms do exist during power-down, power- reads:
up of the panel will cause a reactivation of the
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
alarm sequence and possible activation of the
suppression system. bb. Type in the default first level password (987).
2. Disarm release circuits as per Paragraph 4-4.1. ↵) key. Verify that the dis-
cc. Press the return (↵
3. Remove DC power first by disconnecting the batter- play reads:
ies. 1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
4. Remove AC power second by shutting off the circuit 3:SET 4:TEST
breaker to the panel.

July 2003 4-4 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

dd. Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the

display reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM)
ee. Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then
MM=minutes 0-59). Press the return key.
Verify that the display reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
1:AM 2:PM
ff. Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2
for PM).
gg. Set the date in an analogous procedure, as in
steps dd and ee above.
3. Rearm release circuit per Paragraph 4-4.2.

76-100016-001 4-5 July 2003

PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

July 2003 4-6 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-1 INTRODUCTION 5-3 TROUBLESHOOTING

The effectiveness of this chapter is greatly increased by The PEGAsys system utilizes internal programming for
first reading the entire manual. The service technician must continuous system testing. Most system faults can be iso-
have a sure understanding of the purpose and correct func- lated through the operation of the front panel. Users/tech-
tion of the module/device before attempting corrective nicians can initiate various testing via the use of the system
maintenance. This chapter contains instructions to aid a menu (refer to Paragraph 2-5) after entering a valid
technician in locating faulty modules/devices. password.
This chapter also provides instructions for the removal and Table 5-1. Troubleshooting Index
replacement of the replaceable modules/devices of the
PEGAsys system. Functional
Detailed Replacement
Module/Device Description
Illustration Procedure
Paragraph
! WARNING
Central Control
All service to panel must be done with panel Module
3-3 3-3.1 5-4.2
powered down to prevent damage to panel
Receiver/Transmitter
components, personnel injury, or both. Module
3-4 3-3.2 5-4.3

Power Supply Module 3-5 3-3.3 7-7.5 and 7-7.6

5-2 STANDARD FAULT-ISOLATION
Multi-Loop 1-2.6 and 3-
TECHNIQUES Motherboard
1-7 and 3-6
3.4
Failure of the PEGAsys system to function properly will Basic Motherboard 1-6 1-2.5 7-5
usually be caused by one or more of the following faults:
Signal Output Module 3-7 3-3.5 7-7.1
• Failure of the power supply
Relay Output Module 3-8 3-3.6 7-7.2
• Damaged or faulty wiring Agent Release
3-9 3-3.7 7-7.3
Module
• Component failure
City Tie Module 3-10 3-3.8 7-7.4
When a failure occurs and the cause is not known, check
as many of these items as is practical before starting a Remote Display
3-11 3-3.9 Appendix L
Modules
detailed check. If possible, obtain information about any
changes taking place that may affect the system. ATM Series Driver Manual
3-12 3-3.10
Modules P/N 06-236179-002
5-2.1 Visual Inspection Network Interface
3-13 3-3.11 Appendix J
Card
When troubleshooting, the fault may often be discovered
through visual inspection alone. Some faults, such as Field Device 3-14 3-3.12 5-4.4

shorted transformers or wiring, can be located by sight or Addressable Contact

3-15 3-3.16 7-15
smell. Check for smoke or the odor of burned or over- Input Device
heated parts. Look for loose connections. Visual inspec- Addessable Relay
3-16 3-3.17 7-16
tion is also useful in avoiding damage to the system which Output Device

could occur through improper servicing methods. See Table Air Duct Housing 3-17 3-3.18 See Manual
5-1, Troubleshooting Index, and the paragraphs of this
3-18 thru
chapter for troubleshooting beyond visual inspection. Loop Isolators 3-3.19
3-20

5-2.2 Power Checks PALM for use with

3-21 3-3.20 See Manual 77.100
ORION XT HSSD
Many faults on the system can be caused by problems
Addressable
with power. Ensure battery and line voltages are checked 3-22 3-3.21 Appendix M
AlarmLine Module
prior to troubleshooting the system. Addressable
Signal/Sounder 3-23 3-3.22 Appendix K
Module

76-100016-001 5-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

1. Disconnect plug from terminal T1.

5-4 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 2. Remove the two mounting screws from the module
The following paragraphs provide required tools and step- and move module to gain access to connected wiring.
by-step replacement procedures for the PEGAsys. The pro- 3. Remove the plug from the RS-232 port.
cedures should also be used to assist in module and device 4. Remove power plug from connector jack J1.
installation.
5. Remove new RX/TX module from packing and inspect
! CAUTION for physical damage.
6. Ensure jumper configuration is set.
Some components are subject to damage from
electrostatic discharge (ESD). These 7. Install new RX/TX in the reverse order of the removal
components are not to be removed from their steps (listed above).
protective wrappings until they are to be
installed in their respective equipment
locations, and then only by personnel
connected to earth ground.
5-4.1 Required Tools
The following tools will be required to perform the removal
and replacement procedures.
• Small Flat-Blade Screwdriver
• 6" Flat-Blade Screwdriver
• No. 2 cross-head Screwdriver
• Wire Stripper
• Small Needle Nose Pliers
• Ground Strap
5-4.2 Central Control Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure for replacing the CCM. Figure 5-1. Single Loop Installation
1. Ensure all programming is saved using PCS software.
2. Remove all field wiring and internal cables.
3. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the
CCM in place.
4. Remove CCM from cabinet.
5. Remove new CCM from packing and inspect for physi-
cal damage.
6. Install new CCM in the reverse order of the removal
steps (listed above).
I/ODULE
MO
5-4.3 RX/TX Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure for replacing the RX/TX module. Depending on the
system configuration. (See Figure 5-1 or 5-2.)
Ensure that the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during
/TX
the procedure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on RX DULE
MO

the RX/TX Module conform to the wiring style of the sys-

tem being installed. The RX/TX is shipped from the fac-
tory programmed for Style 6 wiring style. See Appendix I
for the jumper locations on the RX/TX module. The set-
tings are used to set the wiring style ( 4, 6 or 7), with 7 being
used with loop isolators. Jumpers on the RX/TX Module are Figure 5-2. Multi-Loop Installation
noted by JP x and Wx (x = a single digit) call-outs on the
module board. Table 5-2 lists the types of allowable configu-
rations you can select along with their respective jumpers.

July 2003 5-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

Table 5-2. RX/TX Configuration Selection

Style 6 w/
Jumper Style 4 Style 6 Loop Style 7
Isolator

W1 and W2 Open Shorted Shorted Shorted

JP2 Shorted Shorted Open Open

JP3 Shorted Shorted Open Open

Note: Style 7 requires the use of field-installed loop iso-

lators. The RX/TX module requires the use of one
(1) P/N 74-200012-001 isolator module to oper-
ate in the Style 7 configuration.
5-4.4 Field Devices
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure to replace field devices in the PEGAsys system.
Note: Smoke and heat detectors can be replaced with-
out powering down the system. When adding new
loop devices to the system, the panel will need to
be powered down.
If device is in alarm, the alarm must be cleared
prior to removal from the system. If the alarm can-
not be cleared, physically remove the device from
the system, acknowledge all current system events
and power down the system to re-initialize it. Once
the system is online, insert the replacement de-
vice onto the loop.
1. Identify the defective device to be replaced.
2. Remove the defective device from the PC Line.
3. Record the model number and device type.
4. Ensure the new device is an exact replacement. Verify
that the model number is the same as the defective
device.
5. Set the address of the new device to the same as the
defective device using the procedure in Paragraph
2-8.6.
6. Connect the new device to the PC Line where the de-
fective device was removed, if not accomplished in
the previous step. Use the same detector base or elec-
trical box of the defective device.
7. Perform the appropriate test listed below:
• Loop Device Test (Paragraph 4-3.2) for Detection
Devices.
• Walk Test (Paragraph 4-3.4.2) for AI or automatic
initiating device.

76-100016-001 5-3 July 2003

PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

July 2003 5-4 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

CHAPTER 6
PARTS LIST

6-1 INTRODUCTION
The PEGAsys™ system parts list (Table 6-1) provides a
list of all repair parts.
Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List

NOMENCLATURE PART NUMBER

SYSTEMS
PEGAsys Control Unit (includes CCM with one RX/TX Module, one Power Supply/ 76-100000-501
Charger Assembly and Enclosure)
PEGAsys Multi-Loop Control Unit (includes CCM with one Multi-Loop 76-100000-600
Motherboard, one RX/TX Module, one Power Supply/Charger Assembly and Enclosure)
MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Central Control Module (CCM), Single-Loop 76-100008-501/
76-100008-701
Central Control Module (CCM), Multi-Loop 76-100008-600/
76-100008-800
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, includes 4 Amp. Power Supply 76-100009-010
RX/TX Module for Single Loop System 76-100005-001
RX/TX Module for Multi-Loop System 76-100005-002
Main Enclosure 76-100000-502
MODULES
Agent Release Module 76-100001-001
Signal Output Module 76-100003-001
Relay Output Module 76-100004-001
City Tie Module 76-100002-001
Motherboard for eight (8) Optional Output Modules 76-100007-001
Multi-Loop Motherboard for up to eight (8) RX/TX or seven (7) Output Modules 76-100017-001
Network Interface Card 76-100036-500
Remote Display Control Module 76-300000-502
Remote Display Module 76-300000-501
ATM-L Annunciator Driver Board 76-200004-032
ATM-R Relay Driver Board 76-200005-032
POWER SUPPLIES
Power Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 36" Wiring Harness (for main cabinet) 76-100009-002
Power Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 8" Wiring Harness (for expansion cabinet) 76-100009-003

76-100016-001 6-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List (Continued)

NOMENCLATURE PART NUMBER

ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS
PEGAsys Expansion Enclosure (order backplane separately) 76-100000-505
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting Motherboard and four (4) Power Supplies 76-100000-006
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting eight (8) Power Supplies 76-100000-007
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting two (2) I/O Motherboards 76-100000-008
Battery Enclosure for Additional Batteries 76-100010-001
Battery 12 V, 17 AH 06-115915-046
Battery 12 V, 33 AH 89-100052-001
Battery 12 V, 12 AH 06-115915-047
SMARTONE FIELD DEVICES
Intelligent Photoelectric Detector, Model PSD-7152 71-402001-100
Intelligent Ionization Detector, Model CPD-7052 70-402001-100
Intelligent Thermal Detector, Model THD-7252 70-404001-100
6-inch Universal Detector Base, Model 6SB 70-400001-100
4-inch Universal Detector Base, Model 4SB 70-400001-101
Addressable Contact Input Device (N.O.) 70-407008-001
Addressable Contact Input Device (N.C.) 70-407008-002
Addressable Loop Module for ORION™ XT 77-297103-000
Addressable Relay Output Device 70-408004-001
Loop Isolator–1 Gang Box Mounted 74-200012-002
Loop Isolator–Detector Base Mounted 74-200012-004
Loop Isolator–RXTX Mounted 74-200012-001
Alarm Signal/Sounder Module 70-200200-001
Addressable AlarmLine Module 73-100001-001
Addressable AlarmLine Module in NEMA-4 Enclosure 73-100003-001
DUCT HOUSING AND COMPONENTS
DH-2000 Duct Housing without Detector Installed 70-403001-100
DH-2000 PSDI–Duct Housing with Photoelectric Detector Installed 70-403001-152
DH-2000 CPDI–Duct Housing with Ionization Detector Installed 70-403001-052
Sampling Tube–12", The number of sampling holes vary with tube length.
Order sampling tubes that approximate duct width. 06-129500-001
Sampling Tube–24" 06-129500-002
Sampling Tube–48" 06-129500-003
Sampling Tube–72" 06-129500-004
Sampling Tube–96" 06-129500-005
Sampling Tube–120" 06-129500-006
Exhaust Tube Kit 06-129554-001

July 2003 6-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List (Continued)

NOMENCLATURE PART NUMBER

MISCELLANEOUS
Handheld Device Programmer 74-200013-001
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and Terminals 74-100016-001
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems 74-100016-002
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computers 74-100016-003
DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and Terminals (use with 6-Conductor Telephone Cable) 06-129341-001
DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems (use with 6-Conductor Telephone Cable) 06-129317-003
DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computer 06-129373-001
PCS Version 7.X Software 76-100035-002
PCS Version 8.X Software (for use with ORION XT Detectors) 76-100040-001

76-100016-001 6-3 July 2003

PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

July 2003 6-4 76-100016-001


CHAPTER 7
INSTALLATION
7-1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information necessary to install the
PEGAsys™ system. Installation consists of installing a
complete system. The procedures in this chapter should
be accomplished by technicians familiar with fire alarm sys-
tem installation and the requirements of relevant NFPA
regulations.
7-2 MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR
INSTALLATION
The materials listed below are not supplied with the sys-
tem, but are required for installation:
• No. 10 or ¼-inch Mounting Hardware
• Electrical Conduit for AC Input Power
• 4-inch Electrical Junction Boxes (as required)
• Wire-Nuts and Crimp-On Terminals (as required)
• Ground Strap (for handling printed circuit boards)
7-3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR
CENTRAL CONTROL PANEL
The PEGAsys Central Control Panel enclosure is 28 inches
high x 18 inches wide x 5½ inches deep. It is designed to
be surface or semi-flush mounted using No. 10 or ¼-inch
hardware. The type of hardware to be used is at the dis-
cretion of the installer, but must be in accordance with good
electrical and safety practices.
Figure 7-1 shows the hole layout of the enclosure mount-
ing area. The lower set of mounting holes should typically
be 44 inches from the floor in order for the display panel to
be at a convenient viewing height.
To facilitate mounting the enclosure to its wall position, re-
move the enclosure’s front door. Disconnect the ground
wire before removing the door.
To remove the front door, open the door approximately
90º from its closed position and lift it up enough to allow
the door’s hinge pins to clear their mating hinge sockets
located on the left side of the Central Control Panel.
Place the mounting screws into the top two holes in the
wall. Leave approximately ¼-inch of both screws exposed.
Carefully place the two key holes over the screws in the
wall. Ensure the enclosure has its door hinge sockets lo-
cated to the left as you face the enclosure. Allow the en-
closure to gently come to rest on the screws. Tighten the
screws.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys™
18"
28" 25.375"
16"
44"
(FLOOR)
Figure 7-1. CCP Installation Drawing
With the enclosure held by the top two screws, place the
bottom two mounting screws in place. Tighten the screws.
Reinstall the enclosure door at this time. Care must be
taken when installing the door to ensure that the hinge pins
are lined up correctly.
7-4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR
EXPANSION ENCLOSURES
The expansion enclosure (P/N 76-100000-505) uses a
backplate installed in the enclosure to meet various sys-
tem component requirements. The expansion enclosure
maintains the same outside dimensions as the main sys-
tem enclosure. There are three versions of the backplate:
• An output module cardcage with mounting provisions
for up to four (4) power supplies
• Mounting provisions for up to eight (8) power supplies
• Two motherboard cardcages for mounting up to six-
teen (16) output modules in the expansion enclosure.
The optional output motherboard and output modules must
be installed prior to the system being powered up. The
output bus (communications) and 24 Vdc power are at-
tached to connectors located on the output motherboard.
Note: The internal communications bus (RS-485) wiring
must be enclosed in a raceway from the main en-
closure for a maximum run of 20 feet, with expan-
sion enclosures located in the same room as the
main enclosure.
7-1 July 2003
PEGAsys™

Figure 7-2, shows the expansion backplate which provides

mounting for four (4) power supplies and one (1) output
motherboard. Figure 7-3 shows the expansion backplate
which provides mounting for up to eight (8) auxiliary power
supplies. Figure 7-4 shows the expansion backplate which
provides mounting for two (2) output motherboards.
To install, position the back plate in the enclosure and fas-
ten it to the seven studs located in the enclosure using the
nuts supplied with the enclosure.

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)

Figure 7-4. Back Plate, Two Output Motherboards

7-5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR

OUTPUT MOTHERBOARD
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations) dure to install an output motherboard into a single-loop
system.
Figure 7-2. Back Plate, Output Motherboard and
1. Place motherboard on standoffs in the back of the en-
Four Power Supplies
closure.
2. Insert and tighten the twelve (12) mounting screws pro-
MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY

vided with the motherboard.

06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2

3. Connect the 24 Vdc wiring from the power supply to

L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

terminal TB1.
RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
4. Connect the RJ-12 phone style wire from the MOTHER
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

BD connector (on the power supply) to J9 on the

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

motherboard.
RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

7-6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR RX/TX

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY MODULE (MULTI-LOOP ONLY)
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2

The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-

L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

dure for installing an RX/TX module. Refer to Figure 7-5.

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY

Ensure the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the pro-
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L

cedure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/

N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR

TX Module conform to the wiring style of the system being

RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1

installed. The RX/TX is shipped from the factory pro-

SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

grammed for Style 6 wiring style. See Appendix I for jumper

locations on the RX/TX module. The settings are used to
= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations) set the wiring style (4, 6 or 7), 7 being used with loop iso-

Figure 7-3. Back Plate, Eight Power Supplies

July 2003 7-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

lators. Jumpers on the RX/TX Module are noted by JP x
and Wx (x = a single digit) call-outs on the module board.
Table 7-1 lists the types of allowable configurations you
can select along with their respective jumpers.
Note: Since the RX/TXs are not addressed by switches,
the communications socket they are connected to
will become their address. Example: An RX/TX
connected to JP1 on the multi-loop motherboard
will become RX/TX 1, Loop 1. If the same RX/TX
was moved to JP4, the address would become
RX/TX 4, Loop 4.

7-7 INSTALLATION OF OUTPUT MODULES

The output modules can be inserted into the motherboard
I/ODULE
MO
in any order. The CCM automatically reads the output mod-
ules type and address upon PCS configuration upload.
However, it is recommended that modules performing like
functions be placed adjacent to each other to facilitate iden-
tification and field wiring runs. After powering up the sys-
/TX
RX DULE
MO
tem, a list of output module assignments can be requested
from the system menu to verify the registration and accu-
racy of module address(es).

Figure 7-5. Installation for Multi-Loop ! CAUTION

Table 7-1. RX/TX Configuration Selection All personnel installing or servicing PEGAsys
equipment must wear a grounding strap when
Style 6 working in the Central Control panel to avoid
Jumper Style 4 Style 6 Style 7
w/Loop Isolator generating static electricity which can destroy
integrated circuits. Output module printed
W1 and W2 Open Shorted Shorted Shorted circuit boards are shipped in antistatic plastic
JP2 Shorted Shorted Open Open
bags and should be kept in these bags until
they are installed. When the circuit boards are
JP3 Shorted Shorted Open Open removed from the motherboard, they should
be replaced into the appropriate bags. NEVER
Note: Style 7 requires the use of field-installed loop iso- PACK THESE BOARDS IN STYROFOAM OR
lators. The RX/TX module requires the use of one PLASTIC PELLETS.
(1) P/N 74-200012-001 isolator module to oper-
ate in Style 7 configuration. ! WARNING
1. Remove RX/TX module from packing and inspect for Output modules should never be installed in a
physical damage. “powered-up” system. Always disconnect both
AC and battery power before installing or
2. Ensure jumper configuration is set. Refer to Table 7-1
removing modules.
settings for wiring styles.
3. Install loop isolator, P/N 74-200012-001, if used. To remove an output module from the system, remove all
power, remove terminal block from module, remove the
4. Connect 24 Vdc wiring from terminal block (TB1-TB8)
two (2) mounting screws and pull out the module.
to 24 Vdc input plug J1. The terminal block which will
be used to power the RX/TX will be dependant upon The following paragraphs describe the installation proce-
which slot the RX/TX will be installed into. dure for each available output module type.
5. Install the short, 6-conductor cable from the RS-232 7-7.1 Signal Audible Output Module
port on the RX/TX to the appropriate RJ-12 sockets
JP1-JP8. The socket selected is dependant upon which The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
slot the RX/TX will be installed into. to install a signal audible output module into the PEGAsys
system.
6. Place the RX/TX against the mounting bracket in the
PEGAsys, adjacent to its communications socket JP1 1. Remove the signal audible output module from pack-
to JP8. Install the two mounting screws and tighten ing and inspect for physical damage.
until snug. 2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address
7. Remove the RX/TX by reversing the installation steps switch settings.
(listed above). 3. Set jumpers W1-W3 for appropriate A/B wiring styles.
See Appendix I for jumper settings.

76-100016-001 7-3 July 2003

PEGAsys™

4. Cut jumper between W9 and W10 if using an auxiliary 1. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from
24 Vdc power input. packing and inspect for physical damage.
5. Install module into the motherboard. Ensure the con- 2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address
nector mates properly. switch settings.
6. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure 5- 3. See Figure 7-6 to determine the wiring connections
1 or 5-2. between the switching power supply (Aux. Power Sup-
7-7.2 Relay Output Module ply) and monitor module (Main Power Supply).
4. See Appendix I for jumper settings.
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure to install a relay output module into the PEGAsys sys- 5. Install module in the desired position on the backplate
tem. of the main or expansion enclosure.
6. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws/nuts into
1. Remove the relay output module from packing and in-
the four corners of the mounting plate.
spect for physical damage.
WHT

2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address BLK/WHT

ORN
switch settings. RED
RED
BLK
3. Install module into the motherboard. Ensure the con- BLK
VIO
nector mates properly.

SHARE
AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1 DC IN 2
1 2

RET

SPV

RET

SPV
24V

24V
N L N L L N G
attribute ? attribute ? attribute ? attribute ? attribute ? attribute ? attribute ?

4. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure

5-1 or 5-2.
7-7.3 Agent Release Module
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce- (76-100009-010)
dure to install an agent release module into the PEGAsys
system.
1. Remove the agent release module from packing and
inspect for physical damage.
2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address
switch settings.
3. Set switches S3 and S4 for solenoid activation. See AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY WHT

Appendix I for switch settings. (76-100009-002) BLK/WHT

BLK
4. Cut jumper between W1 and W2 if using an auxiliary BLK
VIO
RED
24 Vdc power input. RED
ORN

5. Install module into the motherboard. Ensure the con-

nector mates properly.
6. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure
5-1 or 5-2. Figure 7-6. Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram
7-7.4 City-Tie Output Module 7-7.6 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce- Enclosure
dure to install a city tie output module into the PEGAsys The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
system. dure to install a power supply/charger assembly into the
1. Remove the city-tie module from packing and inspect expansion enclosure.
for physical damage. 1. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from
2. Set module configuration. See Appendix I. packing and inspect for physical damage.
3. Install module in the motherboard. Ensure the con- 2. Set address switches. See Appendix I for address
nector mates properly. switch settings.
4. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to Figure 3. See Figure 7-7 to determine the wiring connections
5-1 or 5-2. between the switching power supply (Aux. Power Sup-
7-7.5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly ply) and monitor module (Main Power Supply).
4. See Appendix I for jumper settings.
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step proce-
dure to install a power supply/charger assembly into the 5. Install module in the desired position on the backplate
PEGAsys system. of the expansion enclosure.

July 2003 7-4 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

N
1
AC OUT
attribute ?

L
WHT

N
2
attribute ?
BLK/WHT

L
L
AC IN
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY

attribute ?

N
G
ORN
(76-100009-010) 24V
(76-100009-003)

attribute ?

DC IN 1
RET RED
SPV
RED

attribute ?
BLK
SHARE
BLK
24V
VIO

attribute ?

DC IN 2
RET

SPV

attribute ?
Figure 7-7. Power Supply/Charger Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure
6. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws into the Figure 7-8. This connection must be daisy-chained to
four corners of the mounting plate. other power supplies in the expansion enclosure, if
Table 7-2. Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to installed. Jumper W4 must be removed from all power
Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly supplies in line, and all in-line motherboard terminat-
ing jumpers must also be removed, except from the
last power supply unit or motherboard in the expan-
Aux. Pow er Supply Function Main Supply
sion enclosure. This will maintain the terminating re-
White AC Input (Neutral) AC Out 2 N sistor at the end of the RS-485 circuit, which is required
to ensure proper operation of the RS-485 communi-
Black/White AC Input (Hot) AC Out 2 L cations. Loop the RS-485 wiring. Do not use T-tap-
ping.
Red DC Output (Pos.) DC In 2 24V

Black DC Output (Neg.) DC In 2 Ret

Violet Supervision DC In 2 Supv

Figure 7-8. RS-485 Connection
Orange Share Share
7-8 CONNECTING AC POWER
7-7.7 Power Supply Communication Connections
AC power must be provided to the Central Control Panel’s
The main power supply communicates with the CCM over internal power supply using three conductors. The AC
the internal RS-485 bus of the PEGAsys system, and can power cable is to be run through a conduit from a dedi-
be connected in different ways. The power supply unit in cated, 15 Amp circuit breaker. The conduit must be at-
the main enclosure of the PEGAsys system communicates tached to the right side of the Central Control Panel
with the CCM over a short phone style cable. The bus ex- enclosure through one of the knockouts near the upper
tends out of the power supply when needed, i.e., to a right corner of the enclosure.
motherboard or other power supply installed in an expan-
sion enclosure. These two examples are accomplished as See Appendix A for AC branch circuit requirement details.
follows:
! WARNING
1. Power supply in main enclosure to motherboard in main
enclosure: a flat 6-conductor phone type cable is at- High voltages may be present when
tached to “CON 2” of power supply and then inserted connecting AC power to the Central Control
into the RJ-12 jack on the motherboard labeled “RS- Panel. Suitable precautions must be taken to
485”. Remove jumper “W4” on the main power supply avoid injury.
to enable the terminating resistor on the motherboard. Note: All Non-Power-Limited wiring must be routed away
The terminating resistor is used to ensure good RS- from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of ¼-
485 communications. inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power
2. Power supplies installed in an expansion enclosure Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR
without a motherboard can use the RS-485 terminal cable per NEC Article 760.
block (TB1). This connection allows the installer to con-
Ensure that the circuit breaker at the dedicated AC power
nect a twisted-pair, 18 AWG cable to terminals A and
source is in the OFF position. Attach the three AC power
B of TB1 on the power supply in the main enclosure
conductors to TB1 on the Central Control Panel power sup-
and connect to the same terminals on the power sup-
ply PCB (see Appendix I).
ply in the expansion enclosure, as shown in

76-100016-001 7-5 July 2003

PEGAsys™

7-9 INSTALL AND CONNECT DC POWER ! CAUTION

Space is provided within the Central Control Panel for two Do not connect the batteries to the system
12 V, 33 AH sealed lead-acid batteries used for 24-hour power supply at this time. Connect the
standby operation. batteries at the end of system installation.
Connection to the power supply must be according to the
7-9.1 Battery Enclosure
instructions in Appendix I.
A separate UL Listed battery enclosure, shown in Figure
7-9 (P/N 76-100010-001), is used to house up to two 12 V,
7-10 FIELD DEVICE CONNECTION TO RX/TX
40 AH, sealed lead-acid batteries. The enclosure is de-
MODULE
signed to be surface mounted using only hardware similar
to that used on the CCP (see Paragraph 7-3) and must be Field devices connect to terminal block (TB1) located on
mounted within 100 feet of the panel. the PEGAsys System’s Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/
TX). The cable connecting the field devices to the RX/TX
Note: Wiring for the batteries to the power supply must
module provides power and bi-directional communications
be sized accordingly to prevent unacceptable volt-
to the loop devices. One RX/TX module can support up to
age drops.
255 SmartOne® addressable field devices. These 255 ad-
7-9.2 Batteries dresses can be any mixture of intelligent loop device in-
puts and outputs without restriction.
Refer to Appendix A for required system power calcula-
tions. Refer to Appendix E for FM Pre-Action/Deluge sprin- Note: All Non-Power Limited wiring must be routed away
kler requirements for 90-hour standby periods. from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of ¼-
inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power
Recommended battery manufacturers and models are:
Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR
Standby cable per NEC Article 760.
Time Battery
7-10.1 Wiring the RX/TX PC Line
24 Hours Panasonic LCR 12 V 17AP,17 AH
The RX/TX PC line uses Broadcast Indexing Protocol (BIP)
(P/N 06-115915-046)
for communications with intelligent loop devices. The PC
60 Hours Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (2 sets) Line may be configured in NFPA-72 Style 4, 6 or 7. The
(P/N 89-100052-001) PC Line is capable of supporting 255 intelligent loop de-
vices on a 2-wire loop.
90 Hours Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (3 sets)
(P/N 89-100052-001) In retrofit applications, existing wiring can be used as long
as it meets NEC 760 and NFPA 72 requirements. When
The batteries should be rated for standby power use and
installing new wiring or using existing wiring, it is neces-
fit within the physical dimensions of the respective enclo-
sary to check line resistance and capacitance. Total line
sure. The batteries must have terminals that accept stan-
resistance cannot be greater than 26 Ohms, and capaci-
dard ring-type solderless connectors. (See Figure 7-9.)
tance can not exceed 0.25 microFarad. Kidde recommends
VENT BOTH
the use of No. 18 AWG minimum twisted, unshielded, low-
SIDES capacitance fire alarm wiring as the connection cable be-
KNOCKOUTS FOR tween the RX/TX Module and the field devices. See
.50 CONDUIT Appendix H for recommended wiring.
(3 PLACES) DOOR

The PC line to the loop devices can be run in conduit to

the Central Control Panel cabinet. The conduit, if used,
0.94“ must be attached through any convenient Central Control
Panel enclosure knockout. Route the connection cable to
TB1 on the RX/TX PCB and insert the end of each con-
nection cable wire into its proper TB1 slot. Tighten the slot
12“
screws firmly. See Figure 7-10 for a conduit to CCP ex-
10“
ample.
0.94“ Twisted, Unshielded
18“ Wire
TB1
* * * * *

20“ 8.25“

RX/TX
Figure 7-9. Battery Enclosure Enclosure
Module

Figure 7-10. Conduit to CCP

July 2003 7-6 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

In retrofit applications where existing wiring will be used, In the Style 6 wiring configurations, the RX/TX automati-
do not exceed the SLC resistance and capacitance limita- cally transmits data and power bi-directionally when a break
tions listed above. All conduit and conductors must meet in the PC line wiring occurs. If the break is in a single con-
NEC, NFPA-72 and any applicable local code requirements. ductor, all loop devices will remain fully operational. For
See Figure 7-11 for existing shielded cable termination. Style 6 PC line connections, if a PC line open trouble is
Optionally, the PC line can be installed in a separate con- encountered, use the system reset switch on the display
duit as shown previously, thus allowing the PC line to use and control board to reset the PC line to normal once the
twisted, unshielded wire. fault is corrected.
Grounding
Nut Addressable

ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED

MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:

FOR SERVICE SEND TO:

SEE INSTALLATION
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001
ASHLAND, MA 01721
400 MAIN ST.
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

06-235578-001
INSTRUCTIONS

MODEL AI, N/O

SmartOne TM
Contact Input
Shielded Device
TB1 PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)

Wire 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RX/TX
Module
Enclosure

Figure 7-11. Shielded Wire to CCP

Note: All new RCUs are shipped from Kidde with their Detector Bases

address set to 000. This address is reserved for

unregistered devices and cannot be used as a reg-
istered address. The unaddressed devices must
be connected to the RX/TX Module one at a time
in order to address them. Otherwise devices may
be pre-addressed or multiple pre-addressed loop
devices may be connected to the RX/TX PC line
at the same time using the hand-held device pro- TB1 of
grammer (P/N 74-200013-001) . RX/TX Module

Refer to Table 7-1 for a list of the types of allowable con- Figure 7-13. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections
figurations that can be selected, along with the respective Loop Isolator devices are available to support NFPA-72
jumper settings for those configurations. As described in Wiring Style 7 and are installed on the PC line of the RX/
this chapter, the PC line can be configured in Style 4, 6 TX module. Isolator packages are available for electrical
or 7. See Figures 7-12 through 7-15. box mount (Single Gang), 6-inch base mount and an RX/
Style 4 configurations allow T-tapping. T-tapping is only TX mount.
limited by sound installation techniques. By "flanking" each group of loop devices with a pair of loop
Addressable isolators, each zone is protected from opens and shorts. A
ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED

MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:

FOR SERVICE SEND TO:

SEE INSTALLATION
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001
ASHLAND, MA 01721
400 MAIN ST.
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

06-235578-001
INSTRUCTIONS

MODEL AI, N/O

SmartOne TM

Contact Input
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
Device zone is defined as a group of loop devices. In this style of
installation, a short circuit between any two loop isolators
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

will not affect any other zone. The isolators on each side
of the short will open the PC line.
Figure 7-15 and the RX/TX Module Installation Wiring
Diagram in Appendix I depict a typical NFPA Style 7
installation.
Detector Bases
Note: The maximum number of loop devices that can
be connected between loop isolators is thirty (30).
During a short circuit fault condition, the control
T-Tap
panel will register a trouble condition for each de-
vice located between the two affected loop isola-
tors.

TB1 of
RX/TX Module

Figure 7-12. Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections

76-100016-001 7-7 July 2003

PEGAsys™

located on the respective output module, insert the end of

each wire into its proper terminal block slot, and tighten
the slot screws firmly.

Zone 2
Instructions for connecting output devices are provided on
Loop Loop
Isolator Isolator
their respective installation wiring diagrams located in the
Appendix I of this manual. Refer to the respective
manufacturer’s literature for specific installation instruc-
tions of output devices.
Zone 1 Zone 3 Note: All Non-Power Limited wiring must be routed away
from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of ¼-
Detector inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power
Base
Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR
Loop Loop
Isolator Isolator cable per NEC Article 760.

7-12 EXTERNAL POWER FAILURE INDICATOR

CONNECTION

TB1 of
The PEGAsys System provides a 2 A @ 30 Vdc SPDT
RX/TX Module relay on the power supply monitor module that de-ener-
gizes (normally powered) in the event of a power supply
Note: Each zone can consist of 30 loop devices
between loop isolators. trouble. Troubles include:
• AC Power Failure
Figure 7-14. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with
Loop Isolators • 24 Vdc Power Supply Failure
• Battery Failure
Loop Loop
Isolator Isolator • Ground Fault
Loop Zone 2 Loop • Communications Failure
Isolator Isolator
The power supply trouble relay is normally powered so
that, in the event of power failure, the relay will transfer to
the de-energized state. The contact can be used to signal
Zone 1 Zone 3
See Note an external power supply trouble indicator.
The wiring to an external power supply trouble indicating
Loop Loop device is to be run through a conduit from the indicating
Isolator Isolator
device to the Central Control Panel. The conduit must be
1 2 3 4
attached to any convenient CCP enclosure knockout. Con-
nect wiring to TB1 on the CCP’s power supply PCB, as
RET

RET
24V

24V

LOOP ISOLATOR
Mounted to RX/TX shown in Figure 3-5.
74-200012-001

RX/TX
Note: Adjacent loop isolators must be within
20 ft. of a device with wiring in conduit.
Figure 7-15. Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection
7-11 OUTPUT SIGNAL CONNECTION
The PEGAsys System provides output signals to drive
alarm devices and communicate with central stations and
control equipment. These outputs are provided on the CCM
and optional output modules.
All field wiring to output devices is to be run from the out-
put device circuit to the field devices. The wiring must be
brought through any convenient Central Control Panel
enclosure knockout. Route the wiring to the terminal block
7-13 DETECTOR INSTALLATION
Refer to the SmartOne® Smoke and Heat Detector Instal-
lation Sheet (P/N 74-212) for installation instructions. Also,
refer to Paragraph 2-8.6 for setting addresses and regis-
tering RCUs.
7-14 SETTING AND ADJUSTING SMOKE AND
HEAT DETECTOR SENSITIVITIES
Set the sensitivity of SmartOne® ionization and photoelec-
tric smoke detectors and heat detectors by setting the
threshold alarm and pre-alarm smoke density and tem-
perature levels respectively. The SmartOne® smoke de-
tectors (Ionization and Photoelectric) were previously
programmed for a device application during the registra-
tion process.

July 2003 7-8 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

The smoke detectors have specific sensitivities for par- The pre-alarm sensitivity ranges, by device type, are:
ticular applications. There are three applications which rep-
Device Open Area High Velocity
resent the majority of detector use: Open Area, Open Area
(High Air Flow) and Duct. Ionization 0.5–1.5%/FT 0.5–1.0 %/FT
The sensitivity adjustment is accomplished in one of two Photoelectric 0.2–3.5 %/FT 0.2–2.0 %/FT
ways:
Device 50 ft. Spacing 70 ft. Spacing
1. Smoke and Heat Detector Configuration. During the
Thermal 80°–155° F 80°–145° F
process of configuring, the operator uses the PCS pro-
gram and selects the application of the detector and 5. This prompt asks the user for the pre-alarm level for
adjusts the settings of the alarm and pre-alarm values the detector(s) to be set. Key in the desired pre-alarm
within the range for the application, or accepts the de- level and press the return key. After pressing return
fault values for the application. the display will read:
2. Sensitivity Setting Operation. This procedure is se- SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY
lected from the user menus. This method is generally ALARM _._ (0.5 -3.0/FT)
used for systems which have been installed and op-
The alarm sensitivity ranges, by device type, are:
erational for a period of time. It should only be used if
there is a need to change the sensitivity of the device. Device Open Area High Velocity
7-14.1 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Ionization 0.5–1.5%/FT 0.5–1.0 %/FT
Detector Sensitivity Procedure
Photoelectric 0.5–3.5 %/FT 0.5–2.0 %/FT
The step-by-step procedure to perform the sensitivity ad-
justment is as follows: Device 50 ft. Spacing 70 ft. Spacing

1. Access the PEGAsys system menus as follows: Thermal 135°–155° F 135°–145° F

a. Press the zero (0) key. Verify that the display reads: 6. This prompt asks the user for the alarm level for the
detector(s) to be set. Key in the desired alarm level
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD and press the return key. After pressing return the dis-
b. Type in the Level 2 password. play will read:

c. ↵) key. Verify that the display

Press the return (↵ LEVELS SET ON XX DETECTORS
reads: 7. This message verifies that the desired sensitivity ad-
justments were done on XX number of detectors. The
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
sensitivity for all specified detectors (depending on
3:SET 4:TEST
which type was previously selected) will be as set in
2. Select the Detector Sensitivity by typing in 3-3-2. Verify this procedure.
that the display reads:
1:IONIZATION 2:PHOTOELECTRIC 7-15 ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT
3:THERMAL (<) to return DEVICE INSTALLATION
3. Select the desired detector style which is to have its The Addressable Contact Input Devices are designed to
sensitivity adjusted. After type selection, the system be installed in a North American 2½-in. (64 mm) deep one-
displays: gang box, or a standard 4 in. square box 1½-in. (38 mm)
SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY deep with a two-gang blank cover. The AI terminal block
DETECTORS FROM _ _ _ _ TO _ _ _ _ will accept #14, #16 and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0 and 0.75
mm2 respectively) with size #18 being a minimum require-
Note: The user would enter the address range of the ment. Refer to the wiring the diagram in Appendix I for
detectors to be adjusted. The range can be from 1 specific connection information. Also refer to Paragraphs
to 255. The system will adjust the sensitivity of all 2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for setting addresses and other param-
the specified type of detectors which were previ- eters. The installation must comply with national and local
ously chosen (Ion, Photo or Heat) within the range. electrical codes.
4. Press the return key and the display will read:
SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY 7-16 ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT DEVICE
PREALARM _._ (0.2 -3.0 / FT) INSTALLATION
The Addressable Contact Output Devices are designed to
be installed in a North American 2½ in. (64 mm) deep one-
gang box, or a standard 4 in. square box 1½ (38 mm)
deep with a two-gang blank cover. The AO terminal block

76-100016-001 7-9 July 2003

PEGAsys™

will accept #14, #16 and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0 and 0.75
mm2 respectively) with size #18 being a minimum require-
ment. See Appendix I for specific connection information.
Also refer to Paragraphs 2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for setting ad-
dresses and other parameters. The installation must com-
ply with national and local electrical codes.
Note: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away
from Power Limited wiring by a minimum of ¼-
inch, per NFPA and UL requirements. For Power
Limited Circuits use Type FPL, FPLP or FPLR
cable per NEC Article 760.
the type required by the terminal device. Route the con-
nection cable to the RS-232 modular plug labelled PC port
jack until it snaps into place. The terminal or computer
must be located in the same room as the Central Control
Panel.
The parameters for and connections to the RS-232 PC
port are as follows:
Parameters:
• 9600 Baud
• 8 Data Bits

7-17 INSTALLATION CHECKOUT • 1 Stop Bit

Before powering up the PEGAsys for the first time, ensure • No Parity
that the following has been completed: Note: These parameters are fixed and not adjustable.
• Central Control Module (CCM), RX/TX Module and Pin and Function:
System Power Supply are secured to the back of the
enclosure. • 1 TX
• CCM is connected to the RX/TX Module, Display As- • 2 Signal Ground
sembly, System Power Supply (communications bus
• 3 RTS
and 24 Vdc) and Remote RS-485 peripheral(s) if any.
• CCM configuration jumpers configured correctly to en- • 4 CTS
sure proper operation of the programmable (signal/ • 5 N/C
release) output (MP1).
• 6 RX
• Optional motherboard, if installed, is connected to the
CCM (communications bus) and system power sup- 7-18.2 Connecting a Printer
ply (24 Vdc). The RS-232 printer port of the CCM is a supervised con-
• RX/TX Module is connected to the CCM (RJ-12) and nection. The installer must enable the printer port for op-
system power supply (24 Vdc). eration. The enabling or disabling of the printer port would
• Output modules, if used, are installed in the be done by accessing the first or second level menu.
motherboard, addressed correctly, configured for ap- A connection cable is all that is needed to connect a serial
propriate mode of operation and their external wiring printer to the RS-232 printer port of the CCM. The follow-
is connected correctly. ing diagram represents the cable.
• Perform the Power-Up procedure in Chapter 4, Para-
CCM PIN PRINTER
graph 4-6.
TX 1. RX (receive data)
• Refer to Chapter 2 for system operations and program-
ming. Sig. Gnd. 2. Sig. Gnd.
RTS 3.
7-18 CONNECTION OF PERIPHERALS CTS* 4. DTR*
The following paragraphs will describe how to connect a N/C 5.
terminal or personal computer and a printer. RX 6.
7-18.1 Connecting a Terminal or Personal * Note: +8 to +12 Vdc signal needed for supervision if us-
Computer ing a graphic annunciator.
A UL Listed EDP terminal or computer can be connected JK2
to the system RS-232 port. A 6-wire RJ-12 type modular Pin 6 Pin 1

phone jack (PC port), located on the CCM, provides easy

connection.
The terminal or computer connection cable must have an
RJ-12 type modular phone plug that connects to the CCM PRINT
(use P/N 74-100016-003, for a DB9 connector for laptops, PORT
or P/N 74-100016-001 for a DB25 connector for personal
computers). The connector at the terminal end must be of Figure 7-16. CCM Printer Port

July 2003 7-10 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX A
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS

disconnect devices, from the power source to the fire alarm/

A-1 AC BRANCH CIRCUIT
The PEGAsys™ fire alarm/suppression control system re-
quires connection to a separate dedicated AC branch cir-
cuit (120 or 240 Vac), which must be labeled FIRE ALARM.
This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the
main power feed of the protected premises. No other equip-
ment may be powered from the fire-alarm branch circuit.
The branch circuit wire must run continuously, without any
suppression control panel. When multiple power supplies
are installed in the system enclosure(s) they must all be
fed from the same circuit. Over-current protection for this
circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Elec-
tric Code, NFPA-72, as well as applicable local codes. Use
a minimum of # 14 AWG with 600-V insulation for this
branch circuit.

Table A-1. AC Branch Circuit Requirements (120 Vac)

Number of
Device Type Current Draw (Amps) Total Current per Device
Devices

Control Panel 1 X 1.9 = 1.9

Auxiliary Power Supply ( ) X 1.9 =

Sum column for AC Branch

= Amps
Current required

Note: Each additional main power supply and auxiliary power supply added to the system would increase the AC
requirement by 1.9 Amps (max.)

Table A-2. AC Branch Circuit Requirements (220 Vac)

Number of
Device Type Current Draw (Amps) Total Current per Device
Devices

Control Panel 1 X 0.95 = 0.95

Auxiliary Power Supply ( ) X 0.95 =

Sum column for AC Branch

= Amps
Current required

Note: Each additional main power supply and auxiliary power supply added to the system would increase the AC
requirement by 0.95 Amps (max.)

76-100016-001 A-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

Note: Use Table A-3 (standby or non-alarm) to determine

A-2 SYSTEM STANDBY POWER main system power supply and any installed aux-
REQUIREMENTS iliary power module standby current requirements.
The control panel provides regulated power for operating
external devices, system operation, and standby battery
charging. The power for operating external devices is ex-
pandable. When using additional main power supplies in
expansion cabinets, each supply must be evaluated for its
loading in the same way as the primary power supply in
the main cabinet.

Table A-3. Standby Power Requirements (24 Vdc)

S tan d b y C u rren t Maximu m S tan d b y

Mo d u le/D evice Mo d u le/S ystem
(Am p s ) C u rren t (Amp s)

Central Control Module 0.070 X 1 = 0.070

RXTX module 0.035 X =

Power supply Moni tor 0.060 X =

Auxi li ary Output 1, Max 1.5A (See Notes 1 and 2) X =

Auxi li ary Output 2, Max 1.5A (See Notes 1 and 2) X =

Multi -Loop Mother Board 0.035 X =

Si gnal Audi ble Output Module 0.025 X =

Relay Output Module 0.010 X =

Ci ty Ti e Output Module 0.030 X =

Agent Release Output Module 0.065 X =

F IE L D D E V IC E S

Ioni zati on Detector 0.000400 X =

Photoelectri c Detector 0.000405 X =

Addressable Contact Input 0.000310 X =

Addressable Contact Output 0.000330 X =

Loop Isolators 0.001 X =

Sum Column for

Standby Load = Amps
(Notes 2)

Note:
1. Auxiliary Outputs must be considered for total standby alarm loading of the system power supply.
2. Use of auxiliary 24 Vdc outputs of during standby operation must not cause the calculated standby current of the
system to exceed its rated maximum as defined in the Table A-6.

July 2003 A-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

using additional main power supplies in expansion

A-3 SYSTEM ALARM POWER cabinets, each supply must be evaluated for its
REQUIREMENTS own loading in the same way as the primary power
Note: Use Table A-4 (Alarm ) to determine alarm current supply in the main cabinet.
requirements for main system power supply and
auxiliary power supply combination (if used). When
Table A-4. Alarm Power Requirements (24 Vdc)
Maximum Alarm
Module/Device Alarm Current (Amps) Module/System
Current (Amps)

Central Control Module 0.210 X 1 = 0.210

CCM MP01 and MP02 Output (See Note 1) X

RXTX Module 0.035 X =

Power Supply Monitor 0.060 X =

Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A (See Note 2) X =

Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A (See Note 2) X =

Multi-Loop Mother Board .035 X =

Signal Audible Output Module 0.135 X =

Signal Module Outputs (See Note 3) X =

Relay Output Module 0.075 X =

City Tie Output Module 0.080 X =

Agent Release Output Module 0.150 X =

Agent Release Module Signal Circuit (See Note 5) X =

Agent Release Module Signal Circuits (Note 4) X =

FIELD DEVICES

Ionization Detector 0.000440 X =

Photoelectric Detector 0.000445 X =

Addressable Contact Input 0.000380 X =

Addressable Zone Monitor 0.000400 X =

Addressable Contact Output 0.000350 X =

Loop Isolators (Active) 0.007 X =

PALM for use with ORION XT HSSD 0.050 X =

Sum Column for

= Amps
Alarm Load

Note:
1. CCM Alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling devices. Each signal
circuit can provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use.
2. Auxiliary Outputs would have to be considered for total alarm loading of the system power supply.
3. Each signal output module's alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling
devices. Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use. There are a total
of four (4) signal circuits per module.
4. Each agent release module contains three signaling circuits per module, which must be evaluated for loading.
Each signal circuit will provide up to 2 Amps of 24 Vdc power for signaling device use.
5. With constant power solenoids, the current draw of the solenoid must be added in the calculation. Momentary
solenoids are negligible in their current draws and should not be added into the calculation.

76-100016-001 A-3 July 2003

PEGAsys™

A-4 CALCULATING BATTERY SIZE

REQUIRED
Table A-5 sums the standby and alarm loads to arrive at
the battery size, in amp hours (AH), needed to support the
control panel. There is a maximum battery size which the
system power supply (P/N 76-100009-010) is capable of
charging. Select batteries which meet or exceed the total
amp hours (AH) calculated and are within the acceptable
range of the system battery charger output, which is 12 to
99 AH. Using the totals from Table A-3 and Table A-4,
complete Table A-5 to determine the total battery (AH) ca-
pacity necessary for the power supply.
Table A-5: Total Battery Capacity Required

Total Standby Load Required Standby Time

(From Table A-3) X (4, 24, 60 or 90) hours =
( ) ( )

Total Alarm Load Required Alarm Time

(From Table A-4) (5 min. enter 0.084)
X =
(10 Min. enter 0.167)
( ) ( )

Total Amp Hours Required

=
(Sum of above)

(Derating Factor) X 0.1 =

Total AH Required
=
(Original AH required + Derating Factor)

Note:
1. Main system enclosure can house up to two (2) 33 AH batteries (P/N 89-100052-001). If an auxiliary power module
is added to the system the batteries must be moved to a separate battery box or secondary enclosure, if used.
2. NFPA 72–2002 Protected Premises or Proprietary fire alarm systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by
five minutes alarm activation.
3. NFPA 72–2002 Auxiliary or Remote Station requires 24 hours of standby power followed by five minutes alarm
activation.
4. NFPA 72–2002 allows four hours of standby battery capacity if there is an automatic starting engine driven genera-
tor.
5. NFPA 2001 requires 24 hours of standby and five minutes of alarm activation.
6. Factory Mutual requires Pre-action and Deluge systems to have 90 hours of battery standby and 10 minutes of
alarm activation.

July 2003 A-4 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

A-5 POWER SUPPLY/BATTERY CAPACITY

The system is capable of charging batteries of various ca-
pacities up to 99 AH; refer to Table A-6 for details concern-
ing battery capacities and charging capabilities.

Table A-6. Battery Capacities

Maximu m Availab le S tan d b y C u rren t Maximu m Availab le S tan d b y C u rren t

B attery (B acku p H o u rs) Am p s Am p s
(F o r On e P o w er S u p p ly) (F o r Tw o P o w er S u p p ly)

12 AH (4 hours) 2.5

17 AH (4 hours) 3.6

33 AH (4 hours) N/A 7.1

33 AH (24 hours) 1.2

160 AH (24 hours) Not Allowed for 1 Power Supply 6.0

66 AH (24 hours) 0.9

99 AH (60 hours) 1.4

99 AH (60 hours) 0.9

160 AH (90 hours) Not Allowed for 1 Power Supply 1.6

A-5.1 Power Requirement Example • Two (2) Signal Output Modules, with signal appliances
totaling .800A on each
The following power calculations will be based on a the
• Four (4) Addressable Contact Output Devices
system configuration listed below:
• One (1) Signaling Device, connected to MP1 of the
Central Control Panel (CCP) with CCM
Field Devices:
• One (1) Output Relay Module
• Central Control Module
• One (1) Agent Release Output Module, has a momen-
• Ten (10) Ionization Detectors tary control head on the releasing circuit and signaling
• Two (2) RX/TX Modules appliances totalling 0.5 A.
• Twenty (20) Photoelectric Detectors A-5.2 AC Branch Current Calculation Example
• One (1) Power Supply Module This example is based on the system specified in the pre-
• Ten (10) Heat Detectors vious paragraph. This system current calculation is for a
• One (1) Multi-Loop Motherboard 120 Vac main feed. Refer to Paragraph A-1 for additional
• Six (6) Addressable Contact Input Devices information.

Table A-7. AC Branch Current Calculation Example

Number of Current Draw Total Current

Device Type
Devices (Amps) per Device

Control Panel 1 X 1.9 = 1.9

Auxiliary Power
0 X 1.9 = 0
Supply

Sum column for

AC Branch
= 1.9 Amps
Current
required

76-100016-001 A-5 July 2003

PEGAsys™

A-5.3 Main Power Supply Loading Examples

This example is based on the same system as above. Re-
fer to Paragraph A-2 for additional information.

Table A-8. Standby or Non-Alarm Power Requirement Calculation

Standby Current Maximum Standby

Module/Device Module/System
(Amps) Current (Amps)

Central Control Module 0.070 X 1 = 0.070

RX/TX module 0.035 X 2 = 0.070

Power supply Monitor 0.060 X 1 = 0.060

Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A X =

Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A X =

Multi-Loop Mother Board 0.035 X 1 = 0.035

Signal Audible Output Module 0.025 X 2 = 0.050

Relay Output Module 0.010 X 1 = 0.010

City Tie Output Module 0.030 X =

Agent Release Output Module 0.065 X 1 = 0.065

FIELD DEVICES

Ionization Detector 0.000400 X 10 = 0.004

Photoelectric Detector 0.000400 X 20 = 0.008

Heat Detector 0.000400 10 0.004

Addressable Contact Input 0.000310 X 6 = 0.0024

Addressable Contact Output 0.000330 X 4 = 0.0016

Loop Isolators 0.001 X =

Sum Column for

= 0.380 Amps
Standby Load

July 2003 A-6 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

Table A-9. Alarm Power Requirement Calculation

Maximu m Alarm
Mo d u le/D evice Alarm C u rren t (Amp s) Mo d u le/S ystem
C u rren t (Amp s)

Central Control Module 0.210 X 1 = 0.210

CCM MP01 and MP02 Output 0.100 X 1 = 0.100

RX/TX Module 0.035 X 2 = 0.070

Power Supply Moni tor 0.060 X 1 = 0.060

Auxi li ary Output 1, Max 1.5A 0 X =

Auxi li ary Output 2, Max 1.5A 0 X =

Multi -Loop Mother Board 0.035 X 1 = 0.035

Si gnal Audi ble Output Module 0.135 X 2 = 0.270

Si gnal Module Outputs 0.800 X total = 0.800

Relay Output Module 0.075 X 1 = 0.075

Ci ty Ti e Output Module 0.080 X =

Agent Release Module 0.150 X 1 = 0.150

0 Usi ng momentary
Agent Release Output Ci rcui ts X 1 = 0
devi ce

Agent Release Module Si gnal Ci rcui t .500 X 1 = 0.500

F IE L D D E V IC E S X =

Ioni zati on Detector 0.000440 X 10 = 0.0044

Photoelectri c Detector 0.000445 X 20 = 0.0088

Heat Detector 0.000440 X 10 = 0.0044

Addressable Contact Input 0.000380 X 6 = 0.0026

Addressable Contact Output 0.000400 X 4 = 0.0018

Loop Isolators (Acti ve) 0.007 X =

Sum Column for Alarm

= 2.292 Amp s
Load

76-100016-001 A-7 July 2003

PEGAsys™

A-5.4 Battery Size Requirement Calculation

Example
This example is based on the same system as above. Re-
fer to Paragraph A-4 for additional information.

Table A-10. Battery Size Requirement Calculation

Total from Standby Power Requirement Required Standby Time

Calculation X (4, 24, 60 or 90) hours = 9.12
(0.380) (24)

Total from Alarm Power Requirement Required Alarm Time

Calculation X (5 min. enter 0.084) = 0.1925
(2.292) (10 Min. enter 0.167) (0.084)

Total of both sums equals Amp Hours

Required = 9.312
(Sum of Above)

(Derating factor) X 0.1 0.9312

Total AH Required
(Original total AH required + Derating = 10.24
Factor)

Example Results: The results of the prior calculations

are as follows:
• Current requirement of the 120 Vac Main Feed is
1.9 Amps.
• System Power Requirement when in Standby is
0.380 Amps.
• System Power Requirements when in Alarm is
2.292 Amps.
• Battery Size Requirement is 10.241 AH. Select 12
AH batteries.

July 2003 A-8 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM EXPANSION

The PEGAsys ML (multi-loop) system (P/N 76-100000-600)

B-1 INTRODUCTION looks much the same as the system in Figure B-2 with the
The PEGAsys system is capable of substantial expansion exception of the multi-loop motherboard (P/N 76-100017-
in the number of RX/TX loops, output modules and sys- 001) in the place of the basic motherboard (P/N 76-100007-
tem output power. The system will support up to sixteen 001). The multi-loop motherboard has the ability to connect
(16) output modules for a single-loop system and twenty- up to eight (8) RX/TX loop controllers, for a maximum of
three (23) output modules for a multi-loop system, with a 2040 intelligent addressable points per system.
maximum of eight (8) of any one type of module. The sys-
tem power supply monitor module can supervise two (2) AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1

SHR
1 2

RET
24V
N L N L G N L

power supply units (4 Amps each for a total of eight [8] DS1 SHR

TB9

DC IN 2
24V

TBL RELAY
NO RET

TB8
C RET
NC

Amps per module), which allows for up to 64 Amps of 24

W1

F1
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY

TP4
Vdc power. The following diagrams will demonstrate the SYSTEM +

BAT
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE

RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

SILENCE
ACKNOWLEDGE -
ALARM SUPERVISORY S3

TP3
SYSTEM
SCROLL 2
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET S1
1
W4
2
S2
1

available ways of expanding the system.

A

Kidde B 24V

SYSTEM POWER
R RET

MOTHER BD CCM
24V
R RET

24V

RET

RET
RET

24V
24V
Figure B-1 shows the single-loop PEGAsys system (P/N
06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2

76-100000-501). This includes the Central Control Mod-

ule (CCM), Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) module, Power
Supply/Charger assembly and the system enclosure. The
basic system can be expanded as shown in the following
paragraphs.

AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1
SHR

1 2
RET
24V

N L N L G N L

DS1 SHR
TB9

DC IN 2

24V
TBL RELAY

NO RET
TB8

C RET
NC
W1

F1
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3

SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY

TP4

SYSTEM +
BAT

AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE

RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

SILENCE
ACKNOWLEDGE -
ALARM SUPERVISORY S3
TP3

SYSTEM
SCROLL 2
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET S1
1
W4
2
S2
1
A

Kidde B 24V
SYSTEM POWER

R RET
MOTHER BD CCM

24V
R RET

24V

RET
RET
RET

24V
24V

06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2

Figure B-2. Single Loop with Motherboard

Figure B-3 shows the PEGAsys system with an auxiliary
power module (P/N 76-100009-002) installed. The auxil-
iary power supply module provides an additional 4 Amps
of 24 Vdc power for a total of 8 Amps for system use. The
unit would be installed if the system required more than
the base system's 4 Amps of 24 Vdc power. When the
auxiliary module is installed, the system batteries are
moved to a battery cabinet (P/N 76-100010-001). The cabi-
net is a UL Listed battery enclosure for use with the
PEGAsys.
Figure B-3 could also be a multi-loop system with the in-
Figure B-1. Single Loop clusion of the multi-loop motherboard and additional
Figure B-2 shows the single-loop PEGAsys system with RX/TX loop controllers.
the optional output motherboard (P/N 76-100007-001) in-
stalled. The output motherboard provides the system with
mechanical and electrical interfaces for up to eight (8) out-
put modules of any style. To install the output modules,
insert them into the desired motherboard slot and fasten
to the metal bracket with the two (2) provided screws.

76-100016-001 B-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

and motherboard) in the expansion enclosure can have its

AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1

terminating jumper installed. The other two must be con-

SHR
1 2

RET
24V
N L N L G N L

figured for inline RS-485 bus supervision.

DS1 SHR

TB9

DC IN 2
24V

TBL RELAY
NO RET

TB8
C RET
NC

W1

F1
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
Auxiliary power supplies within the expansion enclosure
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY

TP4
SYSTEM +

BAT
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE

RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

SILENCE
ACKNOWLEDGE -
ALARM SUPERVISORY S3

TP3
SYSTEM
SCROLL 2
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET S1

can share a set of batteries, or they can individually sup-

1
W4
2
S2
1
A

Kidde B 24V

SYSTEM POWER
R RET

MOTHER BD CCM
24V
R RET

port their own set of batteries.

24V

RET

RET
RET

24V
24V
06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2

AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1

SHR
1 2

RET
24V
N L N L G N L

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3

NO
NC
C
B
A
DS1 SHR

TB9

DC IN 2
24V

W4
TBL RELAY
NO

N
RET

DS1
TB8

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
C RET

N
NC

2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L
W1

F1
24V

S3

DC IN 1
RET

ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
SHR
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY 24V

RET

R
TP4
24V
TB8 TB9
W1
SYSTEM +

BAT
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE

RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

SILENCE
ACKNOWLEDGE -
ALARM S3 TP3 TP4

RET
SUPERVISORY

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
TP3
SYSTEM BAT F1
SCROLL 2 SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET S1
1
W4
2
S2
1
A

Kidde B 24V

SYSTEM POWER
R RET MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3

MOTHER BD CCM

NO
24V

NC
C
B
A
R RET

24V

W4

N
RET

DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
RET

N
RET

24V
24V

L
06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2
24V

S3

DC IN 1
RET

SHR
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
24V

RET

R
24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

Figure B-3. System with Auxiliary Power Supply Module

Figure B-4 shows an expanded single-loop PEGAsys sys- Figure B-4. Expanded Single Loop System
tem which contains two (2) motherboard assemblies, three
Figure B-5 shows an expanded PEGAsys system which is
(3) complete power supply assemblies (24 Amps of 24 Vdc
capable of having eight (8) output modules of various types
power) and up to sixteen (16) total possible output mod-
and a maximum of 24 Vdc power at 40 Amps. This DC
ules. The communications bus interconnections between
power is hardwired into signal and release modules whose
the two motherboards are made by using six (6) conduc-
loading would otherwise cause more than 8 Amps of 24
tors from the bus terminal block on the motherboard in the
Vdc current to be drawn from the motherboard during ac-
main enclosure to connect to the same terminal block on
tivation.
the motherboard in the expansion enclosure. This connec-
tion allows complete supervision by the CCM in the main The hardwire option allows the system installer to provide
enclosure of all output modules installed on the second individual modules with their own power source. Refer to
motherboard. The 24 Vdc power for the motherboard (in the particular module installation diagram in Chapter 7 and
the expansion enclosure) is derived from one of the power Appendix A for power-supply expansion guidelines.
supply assemblies installed within that enclosure and is
Note: One main power supply/charger assembly can be
connected by a two-wire connection.
used to charge a common set of batteries. All other
The power supplies need to be tied to the communica- power supply/charger assemblies can be con-
tions bus for supervision purposes. In the above example, nected to the common set of batteries in parallel
the installer would use a two-conductor cable to connect for backup DC power only. The charging circuit on
the communications bus from the motherboard assembly the additional power supply/charger assemblies
to the power supply. The second power supply could then will have to be disabled by removing jumper W1.
be daisy-chained to the first to complete the communica- Be careful not to exceed the maximum charging
tions connections. The main power supply and capacity of the main power supply.
motherboard in the first enclosure must be configured for
in-line RS-485 bus supervision by removing jumpers W4
and JP1, respectively. Only one of the three bus commu-
nication components (i.e., power supply monitor modules

July 2003 B-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

Figure B-6 shows an expanded PEGAsys system which

could have sixteen (16) output modules and 56 Amps of
AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1

SHR
1 2

RET
24V
N L N L G N L

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3

NO
NC
C
B
A
DS1 SHR

TB9

DC IN 2
24V

TBL RELAY
NO

W4
RET

TB8

N
DS1
C

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
RET

L
NC

24 Vdc power. Figure B-6 also displays the flexibility to

N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
W1

F1

L
24V

S3

DC IN 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
RET

SHR
RET
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY

AUX 1 AUX 2
24V

TP4
RET

R
bring all four power supply assemblies in the second ex-
24V

AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE SYSTEM + TB8 TB9

BAT
SILENCE

RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

W1
ACKNOWLEDGE -
ALARM SUPERVISORY S3

TP3
SYSTEM TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
SCROLL 2 F1
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET S1 SYSTEM POWER
BAT DC IN 2
1
W4
2
S2
1
A

Kidde B 24V

SYSTEM POWER
R

pansion enclosure to one set of batteries. In this arrange-

RET

RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

MOTHER BD CCM
24V MOTHER BD CCM ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3
R

NO
NC
RET

C
B
A
24V

RET

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2
RET
RET

24V

G
24V

AC IN
ment, one of the four power supplies charges the batteries,

N
06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2

L
24V

S3

DC IN 1
RET

SHR
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
24V

RET

R
24V
TB8 TB9
W1

and all four receive standby power from the batteries. Each
TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
power supply must have two of its own conductors con-

06-129562-001
W2 W3

NO
NC
C
B
A
nected directly to the battery set to meet code require-

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L
24V

S3

DC IN 1
RET

ments. The three non-charging power supplies must have

SHR
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
24V

RET

R
24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
Jumper W1 removed to disable their charging circuits. Re-

06-129562-001
W2 W3

NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
fer to Chapter 7 and Appendix A for more details on power

N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L
24V

S3

DC IN 1
RET

SHR
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
24V

RET

expansion.
R

R
24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

Figure B-7 shows an expanded PEGAsys ML system which

could have up to eight (8) RX/TX loop controllers and nine
(9) output modules installed in the two motherboards. The
system also has a maximum 24 Vdc power of 24 Amps,
as shown in the diagram. Refer to Chapter 7 and Appen-
dix A for power supply expansion guidelines.

Figure B-5. Expanded System for up to 8 Output

Modules and 5 Primary/Auxiliary Power Supplies

AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1
SHR

1 2
RET
24V

N L N L G N L

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3 MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001
NO
NC

W2 W3
C
B
A

NO
NC
C
B
A

DS1 SHR
TB9

DC IN 2

24V
W4
TBL RELAY

NO
N

W4

RET
DS1
TB8

1
S2

S1

N
AC OUT

DS1
L

C
1
S2

S1

AC OUT

RET
L
N

NC
2

N
L

2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN

1
2

1
2

G
N

AC IN
N
L
W1

F1

24V
S3

DC IN 1

24V
RET
S3

DC IN 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3

RET
SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY 24V
RET
R

R
TP4

24V
RET
R

TB8 TB9 24V

W1
SYSTEM + TB8 TB9
BAT
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE SILENCE W1

ACKNOWLEDGE -
S3 TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

ALARM SUPERVISORY
TP3

F1 TP3 TP4
RET

SYSTEM
RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT DC IN 2
SCROLL 2 SYSTEM POWER
F1
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET S1
1 SYSTEM POWER
BAT DC IN 2

W4
2
S2
1
A

Kidde B 24V
SYSTEM POWER

R RET MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM

ASHLAND, MA 01721
NO

24V
NC

MOTHER BD CCM TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
C
B
A

W2 W3
R
NO
NC

RET
C
B
A

24V
W4

RET
DS1

W4
S2

S1

AC OUT
L

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
N

L
2
L

N
2
1
2

1
2

L
AC IN

1
2

1
2
RET

N
RET

24V

G
24V

AC IN
L

06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET 24V
S3

DC IN 1

SHR RET
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

SHR
24V
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

RET
24V
R

24V RET
R

TB8 TB9
W1 24V
TB8 TB9
W1
TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
DC IN 2 TP3 TP4
RET

SYSTEM POWER
RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

Figure B-6. Expanded System for up to 16 Output Modules and 7 Primary/Auxiliary Power Supplies

76-100016-001 B-3 July 2003

PEGAsys™

AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1

SHR
1 2

RET
24V
N L N L G N L

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3

NO
NC
C
B
A
DS1 SHR

TB9

DC IN 2
24V

W4
TBL RELAY
NO

N
RET

DS1
TB8

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
C RET

N
NC

2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L
W1

F1
24V

S3

DC IN 1
RET

ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
SHR
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY 24V

RET

R
TP4
24V
TB8 TB9
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE SYSTEM SILENCE + W1

BAT
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ACKNOWLEDGE
-
ALARM SUPERVISORY S3 TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
TP3
SYSTEM BAT F1
SCROLL 2 SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET S1
1
W4
2
S2
1
A

Kidde B 24V

SYSTEM POWER
R RET MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3

MOTHER BD CCM

NO
24V

NC
C
B
A
R RET

24V

W4

N
RET

DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
RET

N
RET

24V
24V

L
06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2
24V

S3

DC IN 1
RET

SHR
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
24V

RET

R
24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

Figure B-7. Expanded ML System for 8 RX/TX and 9 Output Modules

July 2003 B-4 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX C
RELEASING APPLICATIONS

which is optionally programmable to be a signal release

C-1 INTRODUCTION output. The PCS program is used to program the system
The PEGAsys system can be used for agent release, pre- for all functions, including releasing. For complete details,
action sprinkler and deluge sprinkler control applications. refer to the PCS manual. The following features are sup-
When used with UL Listed, compatible actuating and initi- ported for releasing functions.
ating devices, the PEGAsys system meets the require-
ments of the following standards: C-3 ABORT
NFPA 12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems The abort function is a feature which manually stops a dis-
(High Pressure) charge time delay. The PEGAsys supports four styles of
aborts, as listed in Table C-1.
NFPA 12A HALON 1301 Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems C-4 DELAY
NFPA 15 Water Spray Systems The time-delay period is an installer programmable value
NFPA 16 Foam-Water Deluge and Foam-Water which begins to count down after the automatic release
Spray Systems criterion has be attained for a particular protected area.
The time-delay can be programmed for activation after one
NFPA 17 Dry-Chemical Extinguishing Systems or two alarm occurrences.
NFPA 17A Wet-Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 2001 Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems C-5 SOAK
The soak function is used to automatically shut off the re-
C-2 PROGRAMMING leasing solenoid at a pre-determined time after the mapped
inputs activate it. It may be programmed as a 10-minute or
The PEGAsys system can support up to nine (9) indepen- 15-minute soak period. This soak function is for use in NFPA
dently controlled releasing outputs (AR1-AR8 and MP1), 16 applications only.
which are used to control releasing functions. AR1-AR8
are the agent release I/O modules which are inserted into
the I/O motherboard. MP1 is the CCM releasing output

Table C-1. Abort Styles

Abort Type Description

Delay timer continues to count down upon abort activation, and stops at 10 second mark until
Underwriter Laboratories
release of abort switch. Upon release of abort switch, timer resumes the countdown starting at 10
(UL)(Complies with UL 864)
seconds.

Industrial Risk Insurers Functions in similar manner to the UL-type abort, with the only exception that the abort will only
(IRI) (Non-UL) function if held prior to the receipt of the second alarm.

Operation of the abort switch, once an alarm exists, changes the delay timer to the selected delay,
New York City
plus an additional 90 seconds. The timer will not start as long as the abort switch is held. Release of
(Non-UL)
the abort switch continues the countdown from the initial value, plus the 90 seconds additional delay.

Once the delay timer has started, operation of the abort switch restores the timer to its original value.
Local Jurisdiction
The delay timer will not start as long as the abort switch is held. Release of the abort switch
(Non-UL)
continues the countdown.

Note: The abort function will not work if a time delay value is not entered in the EOC programming for the protected
area. Maximum allowable delay is 60 seconds as allowed by UL 864. The abort input is not intended to be used
for a service disconnect.

76-100016-001 C-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

(+) (+)
PC Line PC Line
(-) (-)
In Out
PUSH / HOLD
Remote LED
(Optional) 10K ohms
P/N 06-129025-003

.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED

ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED

MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
SmartOne TM

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721
MODEL AI, N/O

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION

06-235578-001

SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT

400 MAIN ST.

Addressable Contact Monitor P/N 87875201

P/N 70-407008-001
Figure C-1. Addressable Contact Monitor Interconnection with Abort Switch
Note: The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the abort station contacts for supervision. Failure to install this
resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that monitor.

tem Abort switch (P/N 87875201). Figure C-1 shows the

C-6 SPECIAL MODULE TYPES interconnection of the addressable contact monitor and
The PEGAsys provides specific styles of devices which have the abort station switch.
special releasing functions. These devices are: C-6.2 Manual Release Switch
C-6.1 Abort Switch The manual release switch is an addressable contact moni-
The abort switch is connected to an addressable contact tor (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as a manual
monitor (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as an release input. The addressable contact monitor is con-
abort input with a selected abort style, as explained in Table nected to a Listed manual release station such as the Kidde
C-1. The addressable contact monitor is connected to a Suppression Agent Release switch (P/N 84-100007-00X).
Listed abort station, such as the Kidde Suppression Sys- Figure C-2 shows the interconnection of the addressable
contact monitor and the manual release switch.

(+) (+)
PC Line PC Line FIRE FIRE
(-) (-)
In Out ALARM ALARM

Remote LED
(Optional) 10K ohms
PUSH
P/N 06-129025-003 PULL
.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
SmartOne TM

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721
MODEL AI, N/O

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION

06-235578-001

400 MAIN ST.

Addressable Contact Monitor P/N 84-100007-00X

P/N 70-407008-001
Figure C-2. Addressable Contact Monitor Interconnection with Manual Release Switch
Note: The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the manual pull station contacts for supervision. Failure to install
this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that contact monitor.

July 2003 C-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

C-7 AGENT RELEASE APPLICATIONS C-8 PRE-ACTION SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

C-7.1 CCM Release Output Wiring
The PEGAsys system provides one output on the CCM
(MP01, Terminal TB4, sounder 1 "A" leg), that is defaulted
as a release output. See Appendix I and the PCS User's
Manual for details on the configuration of this output.
An example of the CCM releasing circuit wiring is shown in
Figure C-3. For wiring details, see the CCM wiring diagram
in Appendix I.
The PEGAsys system can be used to activate and super-
vise pre-action sprinkler and deluge sprinkler systems for
protection of facilities. The CCM output (MP1) and agent
release output modules (AR1-AR8) can be programmed
for use with most popular sprinkler solenoids.
For sprinkler applications the addressable input module
(P/N 70-407008-00x) can be used to monitor and super-
vise any of the following sprinkler type inputs, as required,
for each particular application. Inputs could be air pres-
sure, waterflow, water level (tank), pump running, etc. Refer
to Chapter 2 for details on programming the addressable
input device for various reporting styles.

SOUNDER 1
REP 1

A B

Figure C-3. CCM Release Output, Wiring Basics

C-7.2 Release Module Output Wiring
The agent release module that the PEGAsys system uses
to provide the release function offers one release output
capable of powering two solenoids simultaneously. Refer
to Appendix I and the PCS User's Manual for details on
configuration of the release outputs, along with all other
system parameters.
All wiring from the agent release module to the release de-
vice is fully supervised, including the actual device in the
circuit. An example of the releasing circuit wiring is pro-
vided in Figure C-4. For all wiring detail, see Appendix I. For
a list of Approved devices, refer to Table 3-2 in this manual.

1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Single Solenoid

1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Two Solenoid
Figure C-4. Release Module, Wiring Basics

76-100016-001 C-3 July 2003

PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

July 2003 C-4 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX D

Space Reserved for Future Use.

76-100016-001 D-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

July 2003 D-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX E
FACTORY MUTUAL SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS
FOR PRE-ACTION AND DELUGE TYPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

E-1 GENERAL INFORMATION

PEGAsys™ system installation applications that require
Factory Mutual (FM) Approval of pre-action and deluge
sprinkler systems must conform to the following guidelines:
• SmartOne® Thermal Detectors, Model THD-7252,
when used, must be installed at 20 ft. spacings. The
pre-alarm and alarm setpoint ranges are as follows:
Pre-Alarm–80° to 155° F
Alarm–135° to 155° F
• Initiating Circuits (RX/TX-PC line) must be configured
for Style 6 wiring. See Appendix I for complete RX/TX
PC line wiring instructions.
• Provide 90 hours of standby battery and 10 minutes of
alarm operation. Refer to Appendix A.
• Agent release output can be CCM output MP1 or agent
release module AR1-AR8. Each output is required to
be configured for solenoid activation. The solenoid out-
put on-time period should be set to either “90 seconds”
or “on until reset” using the PCS program.

76-100016-001 E-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

July 2003 E-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX F
GLOSSARY

A four digit code indicating the sequence or device number of a smart device. 1st digit is the RX/TX loop number and
Address
the remaining three digits are the device number.

A device with the capability to automatically communicate its location and state via a multiplex trunk to a Central
Addressable Device
Control Panel.

Addressable Contact Monitor module that interfaces with an unpowered, contact-type initiating device. Two device types are available:
Device (ACID) Normally Open and Normally Closed.

AdministrativeTask Reports, lists, status and other housekeeping functions of the Central Control Panel.

A pre programmed time delay which causes the system to wait for a confirmation signal during the delay period
AlarmVerification
before activating the pre programmed alarm outputs. Meets the NFPA 72–2002 definition.

Pertaining to representation by means of a continuous variable and physical quantity. For example, to describe a
Analog
physical quantity such as voltage, %/ft., etc.

Analog Input Device See Smart Device.

An enclosure that houses Central Control Module(CCM), Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX), Power Supply,
Central Control Panel
optional Motherboard and Output Modules.

This module is the heart of the system. It contains the main Central Processing Unit, Display Assembly,
Central Control
Programmable Memory, Real-Time Clock, Watch Dog Timer, two RS-232C serial ports, two programmable signal
Module (CCM)
outputs and three Form C relays.

Digital Device A device with two discrete states, such as a Contact Input or Relay Output RCUs.

Distributed Computing power is distributed to the actual real world device. This reduces the communication burden on the loop,
Intelligence thus providing greater immunity to EMI and RFI. All Alarm and Prealarm decisions are made at the device level.

The CPU in photoelectric or ionization detectors measures and stores its detection smoke chamber value 256 times
per day. The CPU averages each day’s values and stores the daily average for 30 days. The daily average is stored
in a scrolling fashion adding the final day’s average and dropping the average that is 30 days old. The values that are
Drift Compensation stored reflect the unique environmental condition that the detector experiences in daily operation. The sum of the
scrolling 30 days is used to establish a reference point for smoke detection under the unique environmental conditions
that the detector experiences. This feature reduces false alarms from environmental influences without reducing
sensitivity.

The display assembly includes: an indicating 80 character alphanumeric display, push button switches to control the
Display Assembly system, and indicating LEDs to display system status. The PEGAsys display assembly is mounted on the CCM and it
communicates with the Central Control Module.

Event Output Control The EOC programming allows combining of inputs to obtain the desired outputs. The EOC language is flexible to suit
(EOC) most any fire alarm/suppression application.

Internal Identifier
Symbols that are used to name or identify a combination of inputs (for example, 1001 + 1004= I001).
(I001–I255)

An optional assembly, located in the Central Control Panel, that has the capacity for eight output modules. Typical
Motherboard
output modules are Relay, Signal Audible and Agent Release.

Loop A daisy-chained SLC.

A device which provides protection against wire to wire short conditions on the RX/TX PC line. Conforms to NFPA
Loop Isolators
Style 7.0.

Multi drop Line Line or circuit interconnecting several devices from a central point.

Multiplex The use of one trunk or pair of wires to communicate with one or more devices. The PEGAsys allows 255 devices to
(Per NFPA-72) communicate on one trunk.

An assembly of conventional circuits, located in the Central Control Panel enclosure, to activate notification
Output Module appliances, releasing solenoids or other devices specified in the system's operational requirements. Typical modules
are Relay and Signal Audible.

76-100016-001 F-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

Memory locations that are programmable by the owner to store a 39-character alphanumeric description of
Ow ner Locations
the location of the initiating and control devices and output modules and circuits.

PC Line Power and communication wires originating from the RX/TX Module. Also called Signal Line Circuit (SLC).

An Output Module located in the Central Control Panel enclosure that interfaces with auxiliary equipment.
Relay Output Module Each module contains four individual programmable SPDT 2 Amp 24 Vdc relays. A total of eight (8) Relay
Output Modules may be used in the system for a total of thirty-two (32) circuits.

An addressable or smart field device that provides a relay contact to control a device such as a fan.
Relay Output RCU
Typically mounts in a 4-inch square electrical box.

Remote Control Unit (RCU) An addressable or smart field device.

The Receiver/Transmitter module is located in the Central Control

RX/TX Module Panel enclosure and functions as a data transmission interface between the Central Control Module and
remote control units (RCUs).

An output module, located in the Central Control Panel enclosure, that provides two Class A, Style Z or four
Class B, Style Y, 24 V, 2 Amp polarized signal circuits. All circuits are supervised for an open or short
Signal Audible Output Module
condition. A maximum of eight (8) modules with thirty-two (32) circuits may be installed in the PEGAsys
system.

Smart smoke detectors (ionization or photoelectric) measure smoke level every nine seconds within their
smoke sensing chamber. After initailly detecting smoke the detector enters an alert state where it measures
Smart Smoke Detector
smoke concentration every two seconds. If the detector detects smoke three out of four samples, it sends a
pre-alarm or alarm signal to the Central Control Panel.

A device with the features of an addressable device but additionally has the computing power to make
Smart Device alarm decisions based on stored calibration and environmental data, and condition of the detector. Also
the device transmits and receives analog values. Examples would be photoelectric or ionization detectors.

A device without the electronics necessary to tie directly to the multiplex trunk. It requires an addressable
Standard Fire Alarm Device input or addressable output device to interface with the PEGAsys system (i.e., conventional smoke and heat
detectors).

A code on the display that identifies an RCU’s status. There are eight (8) field programmable states a RCU
State may be programmed to: Alarm, Trouble, Abort, Manual Alarm, Manual Release, WaterFlow, Supervisory and
Normal.

Provides primary and secondary system power. Stand-by batteries, provide DC voltage to the Power
System Pow er Supply Supply in the event of an AC power failure. The stand-by batteries are located in the Central Control Panel
enclosure.

T-TAP See multi drop Line. Only allowable in Style 4 configuration.

Trouble Relay A non-programmable relay which operates during any system trouble condition.

A message on LCD display that identifies the type of device reporting. The message identifies Smoke and
Type
Heat detectors and Input and Output RCU devices.

Variable Identifier See Internal Identifier (I001-I255).

This timer senses an abnormality in the Central Control Module CPU. If the CPU is operating normally, it
Module Watch Dog Timer
periodically resets the timer. If the timer is not reset, it times out and indicates a system trouble.

% /ft. Percent of smoke obscuration per foot.

July 2003 F-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX G
DISPLAY ABBREVIATIONS

Abbreviation Meaning Abbreviation Meaning

232 RS-232-C OF Off
A.V. Alarm Verification OK All Right
ACK Acknowledge OP Open
ADDR. Address OR Optional Relay
ALM Alarm OUT Output
AOF Alarm Off PC Power Communications Line
BAT. Battery P.S. Power Supply
C.L. Combinational Logic P.W. Password
CD Contact Detector Error POF Pre-alarm Off
CT City Tie PRE Pre-alarm
DISCON Disconnect PRNT Printer
DISP Panel Display PROG Program
DR Drift Error R.P. Remote Panel
EW EEPROM Write Error RTC Real Time Control
EX External Trouble RY Relay Output Module
INP Input SG Signal Output Module
IT Illegal RCU Type SH Short
L9 Line + 9V Trouble SPV Supervisory
LEV. Level TBL Trouble
LV Line Voltage Trouble TE RCU Test No Good
NA NOV RAM Access Error TOF Trouble Off
NG No good TST RCU Test
NR Not Registered UK Unknown Device Connected
O.L. Owner Location VOLT. Voltage
ZA Zone Alarm

76-100016-001 G-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

July 2003 G-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX H
WIRING REQUIREMENTS FOR PEGASYS
SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT (RX/TX)
RECOMMENDED WIRE TYPES
For best results, use twisted, unshielded, low-capacitance, addressable-fire-alarm wire with a nominal wire-to-wire capaci-
tance of approximately 20 pf (i.e., picofarads, where 1 pf = 10-6 µf) per foot for the RX/TX’s signaling-line circuit. Typical wire
types that meet these criteria are indicated below:

Wire Siz e (AWG) Manufacturer Part Number Rating Cap (pf/ft.)

18 Atlas Wire & Cable Corp. 228-18-1-1TP FP L 12.5

West Penn Wire D 980 FP L 16.0

West Penn Wire 60980B F P LP 29.0

Coleman Cable 98181 FP L 19.0

Coleman Cable 98820 F P LR 26.0

Clifford of Vermont, Inc. 1P18 B1 FPL-M FP L 15.0

Comtran Corporation 4184 F P LR 20.0

Belden Wire & Cable Co. 5320UJ FP L 12.5

Belden Wire & Cable Co. 9571 F P LR 22.0

Belden Wire & Cable Co. 6320UJ F P LP 25.0

BSC C 341802E F P LP 25.0

Genesis Cable Systems 4050 FP L 15.0

Genesis Cable Systems 4431 F P LR 15.0

Genesis Cable Systems 4631 F P LP 16.0

16 Atlas Wire & Cable Corp. 228-16-1-1TP FP L 12.5

West Penn Wire D 990 FP L 18.0

Coleman Cable 98161 FP L 20.0

Coleman Cable 98620 F P LR 27.0

Clifford of Vermont, Inc. 1P16 B1 FPL-M FP L 19.0

Comtran Corporation 4234 F P LR 20.0

Belden Wire & Cable Co. 5220UJ FP L 13.5

Belden Wire & Cable Co. 9572 F P LR 29.0

Belden Wire & Cable Co. 6220UJ F P LP 27.0

BSC C 341602E F P LP 18.0

Genesis Cable Systems 4051 FP L 17.0

Genesis Cable Systems 4432 F P LR 17.0

Genesis Cable Systems 4632 F P LP 18.0

76-100016-001 H-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

Wire Siz e (AWG) Manufacturer Part Number Rating Cap (pf/ft.)

14 Atlas Wire & Cable Corp. 228-14-1-1TP FP L 14.5

Coleman Cable 98141 FP L 20.0

Coleman Cable 98420 F P LR 25.0

Comtran Corporation 4240 F P LR 21.0

Belden Wire & Cable Co. 9580 F P LR 27.0

Belden Wire & Cable Co. 6120UJ F P LP 25.9

BSC C 341402E F P LP 20.0

Genesis Cable Systems 4052 FP L 19.0

Genesis Cable Systems 4433 F P LR 19.0

Genesis Cable Systems 4633 F P LP 20.0

12 Coleman Cable 98121 FP L 27.0

Coleman Cable 98200 F P LR 29.0

Genesis Cable Systems 4054 FP L 21.0

Genesis Cable Systems 4434 F P LR 22.0

EXAMPLE NO. 1
Determine the recommended wire size for a daisy-chained, Class-B, Style-4 SLC with 160 RCUs and a total wire length of
7,500 feet. The total wire length is the sum of wiring for the positive and negative SLC legs, and is not the linear distance from
the control unit to the most-remote RCU.
Try #14 AWG wire.
The total SLC wiring resistance is:
7,500 ft. X 2.525 Ω/1,000 ft. = 18.9 Ω.
If we select Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98141 (from Recommended Wire Listing), the total SLC wiring capacitance is:
3,750 ft. x 20 x 10-12 farads/ft. = .075 x 10-6 farads (or, 0.075 µf).
Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98141, is acceptable.
Note: Capacitance values correspond to a pair of wires as compared to resistance values that correspond to a single
conductor. The wire-pair length for this SLC is 3,750 feet, and this value is used for the SLC’s capacitance
calculation.

EXAMPLE NO. 2
Determine the proper wire size for a Class-A, Style-6 SLC with 100 RCUs and a total wire length 6,000 feet. The total wire
length is the sum of wiring for the positive and negative SLC legs for both the primary and redundant communications
circuits, and is not the linear distance from the control unit to the most-remote RCU.
Try #18 AWG wire first. The total SLC wiring resistance is using #18 AWG is:
6,000 ft. X 6.385 Ω/1,000 ft. = 38.3 Ω.
The total SLC wiring resistance (38.3 Ω) when using #18 AWG wire exceeds the maximum SLC wiring resistance of 26 Ω.
Use larger wire.
Try #16 AWG next. The total SLC wiring resistance using #16 AWG is:
6,000 ft. X 4.016 Ω/1,000 ft. = 24.1 Ω.

July 2003 H-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

The total SLC wiring resistance (24.1 Ω) when using #16 AWG wire is less than the maximum SLC wiring resistance of 26
Ω. The SLC wiring resistance using #16 AWG wire is acceptable.
If we select Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98161 (from Recommended Wire Listing), the total SLC wiring capacitance is:
3,000 ft. x 20 x 10-12 farads/ft. = .06 x 10-6 farads (or, 0.06 µf).
Coleman Cable wire, P/N 98161, is acceptable.

76-100016-001 H-3 July 2003

PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

July 2003 H-4 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX I
SYSTEM DRAWINGS

This appendix provides installation diagrams and instructions for various PEGAsys™ system modules.

Component Page No.

Central Control Module I-2
Receiver/Transmitter Module I-6
Power Supply Module (Revision XC) I-8
Power Supply Module (Revision AC) I-9
Agent Release Module I-11
Signal Audible Module I-14
Relay Output Module I-17
City Tie Module I-18
Basic I/O Motherboard I-20
Multi-Loop Motherboard I-22
Addressable Input Device I-24
Addressable Output Device I-25
Addressable Input Device I-26
Addressable Output Device I-27

76-100016-001 I-1 July 2003

 SOUNDER 1 SOUNDER 2 VOLT FREE RELAYS V/F RELAY
A B A B 1 2 FAULT

REP 1
REP 2
- + - + - + - + NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C

July 2003
TB4 TB5 TB1 TB2 TB3

SKT1
PEGAsys™

DISPLAY ASSEMBLY

SEE NOTE 1

CCM RESET JP4 JP3

BUTTOM SEE NOTE 1

JP1
SW1
SEE NOTE 1

IC1
JP2

JK5
RS-485
PORT

TO OUTPUT
MODULES
AND POWER
BT1 SUPPLIES

JK4

I-2
JK2 JK3
PLG2
RX/TX
PORT

JK1
TB6
1 TO RX/TX
LOOP
DISP PRINT PC 24V 5V 0V CONTROLLER
FLT

5V 0V
0V

FLT

PORT PLG1 DISPLAY

24V

PORT PORT
EARTH
SUPPLY

TO REMOTE PC
FOR PROGRAMMING

TO EXTERNAL PRINTER
24 VDC FROM
POWER SUPPLY
PROCESSOR DISPLAY RESET
PORT SWITCH DISPLAY TROUBLE
LED

TITLE
BUZZER

(PEGAsys)
PLG2
SW1
PLG3

PRINT PORT DS1

EARTH FAULT
SUPPLY FAULT
0V
24 VDC

JK1
JK2
JK3
PLG1
PLG2
TB6

Display and Control Assembly

DISPLAY

Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/

PC PORT 24 VDC FROM
PORT

76-100016-001
POWER SUPPLY
 NOTES: 7. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES SPECIFICATION

1. JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS FOR SOUNDER 1

RESISTANCE
DEVICE Imax. "ON" TIME COMMENT

76-100016-001
(min.)
SIGNAL SOUNDER AGENT RELEASE
890181 2.4 A 10 OHM MOMENTARY ---
JP1 ON OFF 899175 2.4 A 10.8 OHM MOMENTARY —
JP2 OFF ON 2.0 A
895630 12 OHM MOMENTARY —
JP3 ON OFF
JP4 OFF ON 897494 1.5 A 15.9 OHM CONTINUOUS —
486500 240 mA 103 OHM CONTINUOUS —
486500-01 240 mA 103 OHM CONTINUOUS —
2. SOUNDER/RELEASE CIRCUITS ARE RATED AT 24VDC, 2A POWER LIMITED.
81-100000-001 440 mA 59 OHM CONTINUOUS —
SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4mA/CIRCUIT
06-118329-001 225 mA 108 OHM CONTINUOUS FM APPROVED ONLY. NOT UL LISTED.
3. ALL RELAY OUTPUTS (VOLT/FREE RELAYS AND V/F RELAY) ARE RATED 06-118384-001 520 mA 46 OHM CONTINUOUS UL LISTED ONLY. NOT FM APPROVED.
AT 30VDC, 1A. FM A 458 mA CONTINUOUS
52 OHM —
SOLENOID B,D 700 mA 34 OHM CONTINUOUS —
4. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE RESISTOR (EOR) -
10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED WITH PANEL. GROUP E,G 420 mA 57 OHM CONTINUOUS —
AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001 (KIT OF 50).
5. IF MP01 IS CONFIGURED AS A RELEASING OUTPUT, 8. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES
A 220 OHM (5W MIN.) RESISTOR COULD BE USED TO SIMULATE
THE CIRCUIT IF NO SOLENOID IS CONNECTED.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE RESISTOR IF SOLENOID IS CONNECTED. SOLENOIDS

890181
6. TO GUARANTEE THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE AT THE RELEASING DEVICE, THE 899175
FOLLOWING TABLE SHALL BE USED.
895630
EX: TO DETERMINE THE TOTAL LOOP LENGTH, MEASURE THE DISTANCE 897494
BETWEEN THE CONTROL HEAD AND THE CONTROL PANEL TERMINAL 486500
BLOCK, THEN MULTIPLY BY TWO. 486500-01

I-3
81-100000-001
WIRE LENGTH (FT.)
DEVICE PART NO. COMMENT 06-118329-001
12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG
890181 300 --- 06-118384-001
200 120
899175 300 200 120 — FM GROUPS
895630 300 200 120 — SPRINKLER
897494 380 240 150 — SOLENOIDS
486500 3000 2000 1200 800 — A,B,D,E,G
486500-01 3000 2000 1200 800 —
81-100000-001 2300 1460 915 570 — 9. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION
FM APPROVED ONLY. REFER TO FENWAL DATA SHEETS
06-118329-001 3000 2000 1200 800
NOT UL LISTED. 75.XXX

RELEASING
UL LISTED ONLY.
06-118384-001 1440 760 480 340
NOT FM APPROVED.
FM A 1440 760 480 340 —
10. S - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS.
SOLENOID B,D 940 500 300 220 —

TITLE
GROUP E,G 1570 760 525 370 —
L - FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS.
MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.

(PEGAsys)
POSITION OF RELAY OUTPUTS DURING NORMAL STANDBY MODE.

VOLT FREE RELAYS FAULT RELAY

(PROGRAMMABLE)
V / F RELAY
FAULT
NO NC C TB1, TB2 NO NC C TB3

Display and Control Assembly

Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
NOTE: THE TROUBLE RELAY CONTACTS

July 2003
PEGAsys™

ARE SHOWN IN THE UNPOWERED STATE.

PEGAsys™

TB4 OR TB5

B
+

+
-

-
2

5
L
S
“Z" STYLE
CLASS A

TB4 OR TB5

B
+

+
-

-
2

5
N/A
EOR = 10K OHM
L
S
“Y" STYLE
CLASS B

EOR

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
Display and Control Assembly
(PEGAsys)

July 2003 I-4 76-100016-001

 SOLENOID PART NO. 890181, 895630 SOLENOID PART NO. 897494
(U.L. LISTED) (U.L. LISTED)

SINGLE CONTROL HEAD SINGLE SOLENOID SINGLE SOLENOID GROUPS A, B, D, E, G

76-100016-001
(U.L. LISTED)
TB4 TB4 TB4

S L
2 2 2
L L -
2 - -
3
S S

1
3 3 3
+ + +
NOTES: NOTES:
NOTES:
1. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2. 1. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2.
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.6 OHMS. 1. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2. 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE: 2.3 OHMS - GROUP A

2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.7 OHMS. 1.5 OHMS - GROUPS B, D

2.5 OHMS - GROUP E, G

SOLENOID PART NO. 899175 SOLENOID PART NO. 486500, 486500-01

(U.L. LISTED)

SINGLE SOLENOID SINGLE SOLENOID

I-5
TB4 TB4
MICROSWITCH

L S

BLK 2 BLK 2
BLU
L -
-
WHT YEL S

RED 3
SOLENOID 3
SAFETY FUSE +
+
NOTES: NOTES:
1. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2. 1. FOR JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS SEE NOTE 1 ON SHEET 2.
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.6 OHMS. 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 6.0 OHMS.

TITLE

(PEGAsys)
Display and Control Assembly
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/

July 2003
PEGAsys™
 24 VDC
(RED)
24 VDC NOTES:
FROM POWER

July 2003
RET SUPPLY 1. SMART DEVICES MAY UTILIZE T-TAP WIRING METHOD IN SMART DETECTORS USED:
RX/TX (BLK) CLASS B, STYLE 4 CONFIGURATION ONLY. PRODUCT NO'S.70-401001-000 70-402001-100
MODULE RS232 PORT 2. MAXIMUM OF 255 LOOP DEVICES PER RX/TX 70-401004-000 71-402001-100
FOR COMMUNICATION LOOP. ANY COMBINATION OF DEVICE TYPE 71-401001-000 70-404001-100
WITH CCM. IS ACCEPTABLE. 71-401004-000 70-403001-XXX
PEGAsys™

3. MAXIMUM 20 LOOP ISOLATORS EXCLUDING ONE ON RX/TX

CAN BE INSTALLED ON PC LINE. NO MORE THAN 30 LOOP
CONTACT INPUT DEVICES:
DEVICES BETWEEN TWO ADJACENT LOOP ISOLATORS.
STYLE 6 (4-WIRE) PC LINE CONFIGURATION IS RECOMMENDED PRODUCT NO'S.70-407002-00X
TO FULLY UTILIZE LOOP ISOLATION FUNCTION. 70-407003-001
4. ARRANGEMENTS FOR PC LINE WIRING 70-407004-001
70-407008-001
70-407008-002
J1 JUMPER STYLE 4 STYLE 6 STYLE 6 w/LOOP ISO. STYLE 7
J2
RELAY OUTPUT DEVICES:
W1 & W2 OPEN SHORTED SHORTED SHORTED
PRODUCT NO.'S70-408002-000
SEE NOTE 4 JP2 IN IN OPEN OUT 70-408003-000
W1 W2 70-408004-001
JP3 IN IN OPEN OUT
LOOP ISOLATORS:
PRODUCT NO.'S
4.1- STYLE SEVEN (7) REQUIRES THE USE OF LOOP RXTX 74-200012-001
ELECT. BOX 74-200012-002

RX/TX
ISOLATORS, THE RXTX MODULE REQUIRES THE USE BASE MOUNT 74-200012-004
OF ONE (1) P/N 74-200012-001 ISOLATOR MODULE
RX/TX TO OPERATE IN THE STYLE 7 CONFIGURATION.

76-100005-001
ORION XT INTERFACE MODULE
4.2- WHEN LOOP ISOLATOR USED: PRODUCT NO. 77-297103-000
PLUG IN THE LOOP ISOLATOR (RXTX) 74-200012-001
AND INTERCONNECT IT USING FLEX CABLES TO J3 ON
CPU RESET LED1
RXTX. MAKE SURE THAT UNEVEN PINS ARE
PC LINE NORMAL LED2 INTERCONNECTED.
LOOP ISOLATOR
RX/TX
5. MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.
CPU RESET SW1

(OPTIONAL) SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS

SHORT-1
PC LINE RESET SW2

I-6
LOOP ISOLATOR

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
74-200012-001 MAX VOLTAGE: 26.4 VDC
1
MIN. VOLTAGE: 19.0 VDC
T1 T1 MAX. LINE CAPACITANCE: 0.25 uF

SHORT-2
J3
MAX. LINE RESISTANCE: 26.0 OHMS

1 2 3 4
MAX. NUMBER OF RCU'S: 255
JP3 JP2 MAX. RIPPLE VOLTAGE: 100 mV RMS
12

J3
LED 1 - RED LED INDICATES RXTX RESET WHEN ON.
LED 2 - GREEN LED INDICATES NORMAL OPERATION OF RXTX PC LINE
TRANSMITTER WHEN BLINKING.
SEE NOTE 4 SW 1 - CPU RESET.
SW 2 - PC LINE REST/DISCONNECT 24V FROM TERM. 2 & 3.

RX/TX ASSEMBLY
74-200005-001

TITLE

(PEGAsys)
Installation Wiring Diagram
Receiver/Transmitter Module

76-100016-001
 CLASS A, STYLE 6 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT W/LOOP ISOLATORS

3
7

LOOP ZONE 2 LOOP

76-100016-001
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR

CLASS A, STYLE 6 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT

3 3 1

7 ZONE 1 ZONE 3 7 2

3
DETECTOR BASE 4

L S
LOOP LOOP
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR

CLASS B, STYLE 4 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT

1
L S
2
1234
3
TB1 OF RX/TX 4

I-7
L S

CLASS A, STYLE 7 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT

NOTES:
LOOP 3 LOOP
ISOLATOR
1. LOOP ISOLATOR DEVICES ARE POLARIZED. SEE DETAILED INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM.
ISOLATOR 7

ZONE 2 2. DENOTES SMART DETECTOR

LOOP LOOP
CONTACT INPUT & RELAY OUTPUT DEVICE. THIS DEVICE IS NOT POLARIZED.
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR

3. FOR CONNECTIONS TO THE LOOP DEVICES OTHER THAN LOOP ISOLATORS, SEE
INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS OF THE PARTICULAR DEVICE.

4. L - FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS.

3 3 S - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS.

ZONE 1 SEE NOTE 5 ZONE 3

TITLE
7 7
5. FOR STYLE 7 WIRING BETWEEN DEVICES AND ADJACENT ISOLATORS MUST BE IN CONDUIT,
NO MORE THAN 20 FEET FROM DEVICE.

(PEGAsys)
6. MAXIMUM 20 LOOP ISOLATORS PER RX/TX LOOP, EXCLUDING ISOLATOR MOUNTED ON
RX/TX MODULE.
LOOP LOOP
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR

Installation Wiring Diagram

NOTE: ADJACENT LOOP ISOLATORS

Receiver/Transmitter Module
MUST BE WITHIN 20 FEET L S
OF DEVICE WITH WIRING
IN CONDUIT. 1234 LOOP ISOLATOR 74-200012-001 MUST
BE INSTALLED ON RX/TX WHEN USING
TB1 OF RX/TX

July 2003
PEGAsys™

LOOP ISOLATORS.
 AC LINE POWER IN
AC NEUTRAL IN
EARTH GROUND
AC LINE OUT TO (120/240VAC, 60/50Hz)

July 2003
FIELD POWER SUPPLY #2
FROM 24VDC POWER (4.0ADC)
INSTALLATION AC NEUTRAL OUT TO
POWER 24VDC RETURN
POWER SUPPLY #2
SUPPLY #1
AC LINE OUT TO SUPERVISION
PEGAsys™

FACTORY POWER SUPPLY #1 CURRENT SHARING COMMON FOR BOTH POWER SUPPLIES
INSTALLATION AC. NEUTRAL OUT TO 24VDC POWER (4.0ADC) NOTES:
FROM
POWER SUPPLY #1 POWER 24VDC RETURN 1. THE TROUBLE RELAY IS SHOWN IN THE
SUPPLY #2 UNPOWERED STATE AND WILL TRANSFER UPON
SUPERVISION
ANY POWER SUPPLY TROUBLE OR POWER
OFF CONDITION.

F
AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1 DC IN 2
1 2 TROUBLES INCLUDE:
N L N L L N G

24V
RET
SPV
SHARE
24V
RET
SPV
SEE NOTE 7 - MICROCONTROLLER FAILURE
- AC FAIL
- BATTERY FAIL
- POWER SUPPLY FAIL
TROUBLE OUTPUT - GROUND FAULT (POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE)
VOLT-FREE NO - LOW BATTERY
GREEN LED

TBL RLY
RELAY CONTACTS C - COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE
RATED AT 2A, 30VDC NC
SYS
GND
THE GREEN LED, DS1, SHALL REMAIN ILLUMINATED
15A FUSE AS LONG AS THE TROUBLE RELAY IS IN THE N.O.
(NOTE 1) POSITION.
W1- CUT OUT W1 TO CONFIGURE THE POWER SUPPLY
ASSEMBLY SO THAT IT MAY USE A BATTERY PAIR 2. WHEN AN AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT IS
CHARGED BY ANOTHER ASSEMBLY. CONFIGURED TO BE RESETTABLE, THE OUTPUT
SHALL TRANSFER FROM 24VDC TO 0V WHENEVER
(NOTE 2)

ASHLAND, MA 01721
CAUTION: THE VOLTAGE FOR THE TWO BATTERIES IN SERIES THE MICROCONTROLLER IS IN RESET. THIS RESET
MUST BE GREATER THAN 22VDC BEFORE CONNECTING
MAY BE CAUSED EITHER BY SOFTWARE OR BY
BATTERIES TO PANEL.
MANUAL RESET OF THE MICROCONTROLLER BY
(NOTE 2) S3 PRESSING S3. THE OUTPUT SHALL BE MAINTAINED
AT 0V AS LONG AS THE MICROCONTROLLER IS
W4- INSTALL THE JUMPER IF THE POWER HELD IN RESET.
(2) 12VDC
SUPPLY BOARD IS HOOKED AS THE 1 SEALED LEAD

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
S1

BAT
LAST DEVICE ON THE RS485 I/O BUS. 2

I-8
ACID BATTERIES
REMOVE THE JUMPER OTHERWISE. +
A 1
S2 - 3. S - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS.
RS-485 TWISTED PAIR 2 15A
B

RS485
24V 24VDC POWER TO CCM
CONNECTION. R RET 24VDC RETURN FACTORY
(NOTE 5) L - FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS.
24V 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX INSTALLATION
R RET
I/O BUS COMMUNICATIONS 24VDC RETURN
24V 24VDC POWER TO MOTHERBOARD R - FOR REGULATED OUTPUTS, 20.4VDC TO 26.4VDC.
INTERFACE FROM CCM FIELD
R RET 24VDC RETURN INSTALLATION

MOTHER BD CCM
4. BATTERIES SHALL BE REPLACED EVERY 48 MONTHS
I/O BUS COMMUNICATIONS L L
INTERFACE TO MOTHERBOARD OR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES.

RET
RET

24V
24V
5. ALL RS-485 INTERCONNECTIONS MUST BE WITHIN

SYSTEM POWER
06-129562-002 AUX 1 AUX 2 THE SAME ROOM WITH THE MAIN PANEL.

S1 AND S2 USE TO ADDRESS 6. “SYS GND” TERMINAL OF TB6 SHALL BE USED TO

POWER SUPPLY/CHARGER ASSEMBLY. INTERCONNECT 24 V RETURNS BETWEEN
MULTIPLE POWER SUPPLIES.
S3: HARD RESET OF MICROPROCESSOR
ON POWER SUPPLY/CHARGER ASSEMBLY BOARD. 7. SOLDER A 0 OHM, 1/4 W ESISTOR ACROSS W5
24VDC AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT #2,

TITLE
PADS WHEN USING 220 VAC POWER.
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5A
24VDC RETURN
FIELD

(PEGAsys)
24VDC AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT #1, INSTALLATION
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5A

Power Supply
24VDC RETURN

Installation Wiring Diagram

76-100016-001
 WHT
BLK/WHT
ORN
RED

76-100016-001
RED
BLK
BLK
VIO

AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1 DC IN 2
1 2
N L N L L N G

24V
RET
SPV
SHARE
24V
RET
SPV
MAIN POWER SUPPLY

I-9
TITLE

(PEGAsys)
WHT
BLK/WHT

Power Supply
BLK
BLK
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
VIO

Installation Wiring Diagram

RED
RED
ORN

July 2003
PEGAsys™
 MODULE
NOTES:

1. MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENTS:

SIGNAL CIRCUIT - 2.0 A
RELEASE CIRCUIT - 2.4 A (MOMENTARY)

July 2003
- 2.0 A (CONTINUOUS)
06-129567-001 SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4 mA/CIRCUIT
2. NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24.0 VDC
ON 3. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF 7. MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
PEGAsys™

LINE RESISTOR (EOR) - 10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED MODULE SWITCH POSITION
S4

1 2
MODULE ADDRESS WITH PANEL. AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001
ASSIGNMENT ADDRESS S3,2 S4,1 S4,2
RESET SWITCH (KIT OF 50).
S3

1 2
SEE NOTE 6 1 ON ON ON
TROUBLE LED 4. A 220 OHM (5W MIN) RESISTOR COULD BE 2 ON ON OFF
USED TO SIMULATE THE RELEASING CIRCUIT
3 ON OFF ON
IF NO SOLENOID IS CONNECTED.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE RESISTOR IF SOLENOID IS 4 ON OFF OFF
CONNECTED. 5 OFF ON ON
6 OFF ON OFF

RELEASE
SEE NOTE 11 5. TO GUARANTEE THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE AT 7 OFF OFF ON
THE RELEASING DEVICE, THE FOLLOWING

76-200001-001
8 OFF OFF OFF
TABLE SHALL BE USED.
EX: TO DETERMINE THE TOTAL LOOP
SEE NOTE 6
S1 LENGTH, MEASURE THE DISTANCE 8. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES

1
SQB SOL
BETWEEN THE CONTROL HEAD
AUXILIARY 1 AND THE CONTROL PANEL TERMINAL
POWER BLOCK, THEN MULTIPLY BY TWO. SOLENOIDS

RELEASE WIRE LENGTH (FT.) 890181

DEVICE PART NO. COMMENT
CIRCUITS 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG 899175

1 2 3 4 5 6
TB1 890181 300 200 120 --- 895630
899175 300 200 120 — 897494
SIGNAL 895630 300 200 120 — 486500
CIRCUITS 897494 380 240 150 — 486500-01
486500 3000 2000 1200 800 — 81-100000-001

7 8 9 10 11 12
12
486500-01 3000 2000 1200 800 — 06-118329-001
RELEASE MODULE 81-100000-001 2300 1460 915 570 —
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721 06-118384-001
FM APPROVED ONLY.
06-118329-001 3000 2000 1200 800 FM GROUPS
NOT UL LISTED.
SPRINKLER

RELEASING
UL LISTED ONLY.
06-118384-001 1440 760 480 340
NOT FM APPROVED. SOLENOIDS
FM A 1440 760 480 340 — A,B,D,E,G
SOLENOID B,D 940 500 300 220 —
RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES SPECIFICATION GROUP E,G 1570 760 525 370 —

I-10
RESISTANCE MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL. 9. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION
DEVICE Imax. (min.) "ON" TIME COMMENT
REFER TO DATA SHEETS 75.XXX SERIES
890181 2.4 A 10 OHM MOMENTARY --- 6. THE FOLLOWING SWITCHES MUST BE SET FOR
899175 2.4 A 10.8 OHM MOMENTARY — SOLENOID(S).
10. S - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS
895630 2.0 A 12 OHM MOMENTARY — SWITCH S1 POSITION ASSIGNMENTS
897494 1.5 A 15.9 OHM CONTINUOUS — SINGLE DUAL
S1 SOLENOID SOLENOID L - FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS
486500 240 mA 103 OHM CONTINUOUS —
240 mA SOL X X
486500-01 103 OHM CONTINUOUS —
SQB X - 11. JUMPERS W1 & W2 MUST BE CUT OUT
81-100000-001 440 mA 59 OHM CONTINUOUS — WHEN AUXILIARY POWER INPUT IS USED.
06-118329-001 225 mA 108 OHM CONTINUOUS FM APPROVED ONLY. NOT UL LISTED. SWITCH S3,1 POSITION ASSIGNMENTS
06-118384-001 520 mA 12. MAXIMUM OF 8 MODULES PER SYSTEM.
46 OHM CONTINUOUS UL LISTED ONLY. NOT FM APPROVED. OFF SOLENOIDS
FM A 458 mA 52 OHM CONTINUOUS —
SOLENOID B,D 700 mA 34 OHM CONTINUOUS —
GROUP E,G 420 mA 57 OHM CONTINUOUS —

TITLE

(PEGAsys)
Release Module
Installation Wiring Diagram

76-100016-001
 SOLENOID PART NO. 890181 AND 895630 SOLENOID PART NO. 897494
(U.L. LISTED) (U.L. LISTED)

SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS

SINGLE TB1 DUAL TB1 TB1 TB1
1 1 1 1
CONTROL HEAD CONTROL HEAD

76-100016-001
2
L
S 3
2 2 2 2 AUXILIARY POWER
S
L + + + + CONNECTION
L
3 3 3 3
S 1 TB1
CKT #1 CKT #1 L CKT #1 +24V
- - - - 1
2 4 2 4 4 4
3 S 3 S
S L
+ + + +
5 5 5 5 2
L RET.
1
CKT #2 1
CKT #2 CKT #2
- - - -
6 6 6 6

NOTE:
NOTES: JUMPERS W1 & W2 TO BE REMOVED
NOTES:
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ". 1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3, WHEN AUXILIARY POWER USED.
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.6 OHMS. 1 TO "OFF ".
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE
IS TO BE 0.7 OHMS.

SOLENOID PART NO. 486500, 486500-01

SOLENOID PART NO. 899175 (U.L. LISTED) SIGNAL CIRCUITS

SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS

SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS
TB1 TB1 TB1 TB1 TB1 S L
1 1 1 1 7

I-11
MICROSWITCH -
CKT #1 10K EOR
L

S L 2 S L 2 2 2 8
S + S L
BLK + BLK + RED + +
BLU 3 BLU 3 3 3 9
L RED -
CKT #1 CKT #2 10K EOR
YEL - YEL - - BLK -
WHT 4 WHT 4 4 4 10
S
+ + S L
+ BLK + +
5 BLU 5 5 5 11
SOLENOID RED -
CKT #2 CKT #2 10K EOR
SAFETY FUSE - YEL - BLK - BLK -
6 WHT 6 6 6 12
+
S L
S L
NOTES:
NOTES: 1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ". 1 TO "OFF ".

TITLE
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.6 OHMS. 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE
IS TO BE 6.0 OHMS.

(PEGAsys)
Release Module
Installation Wiring Diagram

July 2003
PEGAsys™
 FM GROUP SPRINKLER SOLENOIDS

July 2003
GROUP A GROUP B,D
(U.L. LISTED) (U.L. LISTED)
PEGAsys™

SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS

TB1 TB1 TB1 TB1

1 1
L
2 2
S +
+ +
3 3
L CKT #1
- -
4 4
S
S L
+ +
5 5
CKT #2
- -
6 6
1 1
L
2 2
+ S
3 3
CKT #1 L CKT #1
- -
S 4 4
S L
+ +
5 5
CKT #2 CKT #2
- -
6 6

NOTES: NOTES:
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ". 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 2.3 OHMS. IS TO BE 1.5 OHMS.

I-12
GROUP E,G
(U.L. LISTED)
SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS

TB1 TB1
1 1
L

TITLE
2 2
+
S +
3 3

(PEGAsys)
L CKT #1
- -
4 4

Release Module
S
+ +
5 5
CKT #2
- -
6 6

Installation Wiring Diagram

S L
NOTES:
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE

76-100016-001
IS TO BE 2.5 OHMS.
 NOTES:
1. MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENTS:
SIGNAL CIRCUIT - 2.0 A
06-129569-001 SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4 mA/CIRCUIT
2. NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24.0 VDC

76-100016-001
3. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE
RESISTOR (EOR) - 10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED WITH
ON PANEL. AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001
RESET SWITCH SEE NOTE 4 (KIT OF 50).
TROUBLE LED MODULE ADDRESS
4. MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
ASSIGNMENT
MODULE SWITCH POSITION

1 2 1 2 1 2
SEE NOTE 5 ADDRESS SW2,2 SW1,1 SW1,2
1 ON ON ON

SIG. AUD.
2 ON ON OFF
3 ON OFF ON

76-100003-001
4 ON OFF OFF
5 OFF ON ON
6 OFF ON OFF

1
AUXILIARY 1 7 OFF OFF ON
POWER 8 OFF OFF OFF
NOT USED 5. EITHER SOUNDER OUTPUT (2) MAY BE CONFIGURED
FOR EITHER 2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y" OR 1 CLASS A, STYLE "Z",
TB1 USING JUMPER AND DIP SWITCH SETTINGS SHOWN ON
SOUNDER SEE NOTE 8 SHEETS 2 & 3.
CIRCUITS
1-4 6. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION

12
REFER TO DATA SHEETS 75.XXX SERIES.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
12
ONLY POLARIZED SIGNALLING DEVICES TO BE USED.

I-13
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721 7. S - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS

L - FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS

8. JUMPERS W9 & W10 MUST BE CUT OUT

WHEN AUXILIARY POWER INPUT IS USED.
9. MAXIMUM OF 8 MODULES PER SYSTEM.
10. MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.

TITLE

(PEGAsys)
Signal Audible Module
Installation Wiring Diagram

July 2003
PEGAsys™
July 2003
4 CLASS B, STYLE "Y" 2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y" AND 1 CLASS A, STYLE "Z"
PEGAsys™

TB1 TB1

5 5
- CIRCUIT 1 -
L S CIRCUIT 1
L S L S L S
6 6
10K 10K - CIRCUIT 2 10K 10K -
EOR CIRCUIT 2
EOR 7 EOR EOR
7
+ +

8 8
+ +

9 9
- -
L S L S CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 3
10 10
10K 10K - 10K -
CIRCUIT 4 L S EOR
EOR EOR
11 11
+ +

12 12

I-14
+ +

JUMPERS SWITCHES JUMPERS SWITCHES

W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 SW2,1 SW3,2 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 SW2,1 SW3,2
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF

AUXILIARY POWER CONNECTION

TB1

TITLE
+24VDC
1

(PEGAsys)
AUXILIARY
POWER RET
2

Signal Audible Module

Installation Wiring Diagram

76-100016-001
 2 CLASS A, STYLE "Z" 1 CLASS A, STYLE "Z" AND 2 CLASS B, STYLE "Y"

TB1 TB1

76-100016-001
5 5
- -
CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 1
6 6
10K - 10K -
L S EOR L S EOR
7 7
+ +

8 8
+ +

9 9
- -
CIRCUIT 3 L S L S CIRCUIT 3
10 10
10K - 10K 10K -
L S EOR CIRCUIT 4
EOR EOR
11 11
+ +

12 12
+ +

I-15
JUMPERS SWITCHES JUMPERS SWITCHES
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 SW2,1 SW3,2 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 SW2,1 SW3,2
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

TITLE

(PEGAsys)
Signal Audible Module
Installation Wiring Diagram

July 2003
PEGAsys™
PEGAsys™

RELAY
76-10004-001

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Relay Output Module
(PEGAsys)

July 2003 I-16 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

CITY TIE
76-100002-001

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
City Tie Module
(PEGAsys)

76-100016-001 I-17 July 2003

PEGAsys™

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
City Tie Module
(PEGAsys)

July 2003 I-18 76-100016-001

 J9
RS-485

76-100016-001
TB2
R1 W1 COM TBL
COM ALM
SIG GND
485A
485B
RET
+24V
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 TB1
1. POWER CONNECTIONS:

1). TB1 BRINGS 24VDC POWER FROM POWER SUPPLY TB5 OR TB6 TERMINAL BLOCKS.

2). 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX MODULES (J1) FROM TB5 OR TB6 ON POWER SUPPLY.

3). TERMINAL TB1 CAN BE USED TO BRING POWER TO OUTPUT MODULES IN THE AUXILIARY BOX.

I-19
2. COMMUNICATIONS:

1). J9 CONNECTS TO CCM PORT AND PROVIDES OUTPUT MODULES WITH RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

2). J1 THROUGH J8 TO BE USED TO PLUG IN OUTPUT MODULES AND SUPPLY THEM WITH +24VDC
POWER AND RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.
3). RS232 COMMUNICATIONS FOR RX/TX MODULE TO BE PROVIDED THROUGH PHONE CABLE
PLUGGED INTO "RX/TX" PORT ON CCM.
4). TB2 TO BE USED TO INTERCONNECT TO AUXILIARY PANELS' MOTHER BOARD AND POWER

TITLE
SUPPLIES TO PROVIDE RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

(PEGAsys)
NOTE: 1. USE RED WIRES FOR +24VDC AND BLACK FOR RET.

2. JUMPER W1 SHOULD BE IN. MAKE SURE THAT JUMPER W4 ON POWER SUPPLY CONTROL BOARD IS OUT.

Basic I/0 Motherboard

Installation Wiring Diagram

July 2003
PEGAsys™
PEGAsys™

TO POWER SUPPLY
TO CCM RS-485 PORT
TO CCM RX/TX PORT

/TX E
RXDUL
MO
TP LE
UT
OU DU
MO

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Basic Output Motherboard
(PEGAsys)

July 2003 I-20 76-100016-001

 JP10

RS-232

76-100016-001
TB11
RET
+24V

TB8 TB7 TB6 TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 TB1 JP9

RS-485

TB10
W1 JP8 JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4 JP3 JP2 JP1 COM TBL
COM ALM
SIG GND
485A
485B
RET
+24V
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 TB9

1. POWER CONNECTIONS:

1). TB9 AND TB11 BRING 24VDC POWER FROM POWER SUPPLY TB5 AND TB6.

I-21
2). TB1 THROUGH TB8 TO BE USED TO CONNECT 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX MODULES.

3). TERMINAL TB9 CAN BE USED TO BRING POWER TO OUTPUT MODULES IN THE AUXILIARY BOX.

2. COMMUNICATIONS:

1). JP10 CONNECTS TO CCM MODULE AND SUPPLIES RS232 COMMUNICATION FOR RX/TX MODULES.

2). JP1 THROUGH JP8 TO BE CONNECTED TO RX/TX MODULES J2 CONNECTORS TO PROVIDE RS232 COMMUNICATIONS.

3). JP9 CONNECTS TO CCM PORT AND PROVIDES OUTPUT MODULES WITH RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

4). J1 THROUGH J7 TO BE USED TO PLUG IN OUTPUT MODULES AND SUPPLY THEM WITH +24VDC POWER AND RS485

TITLE
COMMUNICATIONS.

(PEGAsys)
5). TB10 TO BE USED TO INTERCONNECT TO AUXILIARY PANEL MOTHERBOARD AND POWER SUPPLIES TO PROVIDE
RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

NOTE: 1. USE RED WIRES FOR +24 VDC AND BLACK FOR RET.

2. INSTALL THE W1 JUMPER IF THE MOTHERBOARD IS INSTALLED AS THE LAST COMPONENT ON THE RS-485

Multi-Loop Motherboard
COMMUNICATIONS BUS. OTHERWISE REMOVE THE JUMPER.

Installation Wiring Diagram

3. THE FIRST RX/TX MODULE (LOOP #1) SHOULD BE ALWAYS ON THE FAR RIGHT AND INTERCONNECTED
TO JP1 AND TB1. ALL CONSECUTIVE RX/TX MODULES SHOULD BE PLUGGED FROM RIGHT TO LEFT
STARTING FROM THE FIRST RX/TX. (CONNECTOR NUMBER IS ASSOCIATED WITH LOOP NUMBER).

July 2003
PEGAsys™
PEGAsys™

/TX E
RXDUL
MO
TP LE
UT
O DU
MO
U

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Multi-Loop Motherboard
(PEGAsys)

July 2003 I-22 76-100016-001

 GRAY TO CATHODE TO NOTES
REMOTE
TO ANODE LED 1. RED AND BLACK WIIRES ARE NON-POLERIZED POWER
ORANGE
INPUTS. REFER TO RX/TX (CAT. NO. 76-100005-001
TO REMOVE WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTION TO SMART
BROWN CONTACT DETECTOR MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT AND
DEVICE CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS.

76-100016-001
WHITE
BN 2. SUPERVISED LINE FOR REMOTE CONTACT DEVICE
EOL CONNECTION. CAUTION: CONTACT DEVICE MUST
N/O BE IN THE SAME ROOM AS ADDRESSABLE CONTACT
WH INPUT DEVICE, WITH ALL WIRING ENCLOSED IN
CONDUIT, AND A MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 150 FT.

EOL SEE NOTE 3 3. EOL RESISTOR: 820 OHM .5 WATT

(FENWAL PART NO. 06-129025-001)

PROTECTIVE 4. TO REMOTE LED (FENWAL PART NO. 70-410001-000)

COVERING OBSERVE POLARITY: ORANGE (ANODE), GRAY (CATHODE)
CAUTION: LED MUST BE IN THE SAME ROOM AS
UL LABEL ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE, WITH ALL
WIRING ENCLOSED IN CONDUIT AND A MAXIMUM LENGTH
50FT.. LED CIRCUIT IS NOT SUPERVISED.

5. MAXIMUM CURRENT REQUIREMENTS

STANDBYALARM
310uA 380uA

6. SMART DETECTOR PRODUCT NO.’S 70-40XXXX-XXX AND

TYPICAL CONFIGURATIONS 71-40XXXX-XXX MAY BE MIXED ON THE SAME MULTIPLEX
TRUNK CIRCUIT, BUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 255 TOTAL
N.O. CONTACT DEVICES DEVICES PER CIRCUIT, 2040 PER SYSTEM.

MANUAL PULL STATION 7. TYPICAL PULES RATE:

NORMAL: 9 SECONDS
BK RD
ALARM: 2 SECONDS
SEE NOTE 1 TROUBLE: NO LED PULSING

I-23
EOL 8. REFER TO SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL FOR APPLICATION
OF ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE.

9. WIRING INFORMATION SHOWN FOR 70-407002-00X THRU

70-407004-00X.
WATERFLOW

CAT. NO. DESCRIPTION

EOL -000 NORMALLY OPEN

-001 NORMALLY CLOSED

FOR SUPERVISORY USE ONLY
SEE NOTE 3

TITLE

NO/NC (Obsolete)
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Contact Input Device

July 2003
PEGAsys™
July 2003
BROWN ( N/C )
ORANGE ( COM ) SEE NOTE 2
N.C.
PEGAsys™

COM. FIELD WHITE ( N/O )

CONNECTION

N.O.
NOTES

1. RED AND BLACK WIIRES ARE NON-POLERIZED POWER

INPUTS. REFER TO RX/TX (CAT. Number 30-402001-000 &
76-100005-001) WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTION TO
SMART DETECTOR MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT AND
CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS.

2. RELAY OUTPUTS ARE NOT SUPERVISED.

CAUTION: … RATING: 2A, 30 VDC (RESISTIVE)
.6A, 120 VAC (RESISTIVE)

PROTECTIVE 3. MAXIMUM CURRENT REQUIREMENTS:

STANDBY: 325uA
COVERING
4. SMART DETECTOR PRODUCT NO.’S 70-40XXXX-XXX AND
UL LABEL 71-40XXXX-XXX MAY BE MIXED ON THE SAME MULTIPLEX
TRUNK CIRCUIT, BUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 255 TOTAL
DEVICES PER CIRCUIT, 2040 PER SYSTEM.

5. TYPICAL PULSE RATE:

RELAY RESET (STANDBY): 9 SECONDS
RELAY SET: 2 SECONDS

I-24
TROUBLE STATE: NO LED PULSING

6. REFER TO SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL FOR APPLICATION

OF ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT

7. MOUNTS IN 4“ SQUARE ELECTRICAL BOX.

LED 8. MUST BE INSTALLED IN A U.L. LISTED GANG BOX..

(SEE NOTE 5)
9. WIRING INFORMATION SHOWN FOR 70-408002-000 THRU
70-408003-000.

RD BK

SEE NOTES 1 & 9

TITLE

(Obsolete)
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Relay Output Device

76-100016-001
 Typical N.O. Initiating
Devices

76-100016-001
NOTES
See Notes: 1, 2, and 4
1. Maximum 25Ω resistance per wire for
initiating circuit. For a total circuit wiring
resistance of 50Ω max.
See Note 3
EOL 2. Terminal connection supports wiring from
(+) (+) (Listed 10K Resistor) #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) to #14 AWG (1.5
PC Line PC Line mm2)
(-) (-)
In Out 3. Refer to Control Panel Manual for
addressable loop wiring specification.
See Note 3 Typical N.C. Supervisory 4. Maximum 10 VDC @ 1 mA.
Devices
5. This module will not support 2-wire
Remote LED smoke detectors.
(Optional)
6. N/O initiating device circuit is NFPA
Class B/Style B.
See Note 7

I-25
7. Rating on LED circuit: 26 VDC Max. 7
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
mA Max. If not used leave terminals
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED open circuit.
8. All wiring is power limited and super-
vised.
EOL 9. The AI, N/C Device is intended for use
(Listed 10K Resistor) within the control equipment providing
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
the normally closed contact.

SmartOne TM
MODEL AI, N/O
INSTRUCTIONS
06-235578-001
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN ST.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED 10. The initiating device and remote LED

CAT. NO. 70-407008-001

SEE INSTALLATION
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
DATE OF MANUFACTURE:

MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
annunciator (if used) must be located in
the same room as the AI.

TITLE
AI, N/O AI, N/C

NO/NC
11. Use Listed 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor,
P/N 70-411001-005.

Installation Wiring Diagram

Addressable Contact Input Device

July 2003
PEGAsys™
July 2003
PEGAsys™

N/O 7
COM Field
6
Connections NOTES
N/C 5

1. AO must be installed in the same

room as the device it is controlling .
See Note 3 See Note 3 2. Terminal connection supports wiring
(+) (+) from #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) to #14
PC Line PC Line AWG (1.5 mm2)
(-) (-)
In Out 3. Refer to Control Panel Manual for
addressable loop wiring specifica-
tion.
4. PC Line wiring is power limited and

I-26
supervised.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(+) (-) (+) (-)
N/O COM N/C
PC PC PC PC

TM

-
MODEL AO
SmartOne
INSTRUCTIONS
06-235577-001

1 of 1
TITLE
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN ST.
ASHLAND, MA 01721

SHEET
CAT. NO. 70-408004-001
SEE INSTALLATION
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
DATE OF MANUFACTURE:

MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F

TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED
TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED

REVISION
New Design
DRAWING No.
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Relay Output Device

76-100016-001
 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX J
PEGASYS NETWORK INTERFACE CARD

the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program manu-

J-1 INTRODUCTION als (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015), which should be referred to.
The PEGAsys™ Network Interface Card (NIC) provides the Note: It is not possible to download configuration infor-
capability for peer-to-peer communication between mation to all the NICs on a network simultaneously.
PEGAsys fire/suppression control panels (nodes). The NIC Each NIC (node) must be configured indepen-
mounts as a daughter card on the PEGAsys Central Con- dently.
trol Module (CCM). Up to thirty-two (32) nodes may be
networked to form groups. Groups are numbered into logi- The operator can set network configuration options on the
cal groupings that delineate the extended coverage area PEGAsys in three ways:
and simplify programming. • Via the keypad on the Central Control Module.
Note: PEGAsys SL/ML control units may be networked • Via PCS.
with PEGAsys LV Control Units
• Via a “dumb terminal.”
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
CAT. NO. 74-200036-001 Below are the network options which can be configured
J1 DS4 DS2 DS3 DS1 for each node and are stored in that panel's memory. Para-
N2 N1 I2 I1
graphs detailing each option follow:
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1
C26
1 • Network Style: None, Single-Channel (Style 4),
TB4 TB2 TB3 TB1
D or Redundant Channel (Style 7).
CR3

U12
CR2 K2 CR1 K1
K3
C27
1 • Node number: 0 to 32.
R23

U13
RV11

U11 • Network group number: 0 to 32.

RV12

K4 R46
R45 C12 GND
RV6 RV8 RV2 TP1
• Processing of network RESET messages: En-
RV10

+5
RV4 RV9 RV3 C20 U2
1 TP2
abled/Disabled.
C23

RV5 RV7 RV1 I1

E1

Y1
R24

R10
E8

TP3
+ N1
TP4
C13
• Processing of network SILENCE messages: En-
R25

N2
R6
R5

R3
R4
E7

E3
E6

E5

E2
E4

U7 C4
+

C3
+

TP5
1 I2
abled/Disabled.
R14

C5 TP6
R22 1
C2

U3
R36
R2

U18
R20 1 1 U5 C11 C14
• Logging all events: Enabled/Disabled.
C18
R13
R21

R41
R40 1 U4
U20
U19
1
1
U21 C16 1 1 • Time resynchronization (resynch) period.
R44 R12 R19
C1

U14 R17 U16 R32

C10
R43

C25 R29
R33
R15

C9 1 R1
U17
C22
U10 U9
R34 • Central Station.
Q4 C8 1
U15
U8
Q3
R7

Q1 1 1 1 1
J-2.1.1 NETWORK STYLE
+
R42

R26 R31 R38

Q2
1
U6 R18
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
Figure J-1. Network Interface Card (NIC)
Each PEGAsys control panel which is a network node (i.e.,
equipped with a NIC) may be assigned to a designated
network group (numbered 1 through 32) or to network
group 0. When an event occurs at a node, notification of
the particular alarm, trouble, abort, etc., will be delivered
to each of the other nodes on the network in the form of a
message.
J-2 CONFIGURATION/ADDRESSING
J-2.1 Overview
Each node can be configured independently using any of
the three methods described in the following paragraphs.
The configuration process is dealt with in more detail in
C7
R28
R27 C17
C15 C24
Both of the two independent data channels can be enabled
ASHLAND, MA 01721
(Style 7), or either one of the channels can be disabled
(Style 4). These data channels transmit network informa-
tion from one node to the next, or bi-directionally if nodes
are connected on either side of the transmitting node. In
Style 7 configuration, data transfer is redundant so that if
there is a failure on one channel, or its cable, the other
channel will maintain communications.
J-2.1.2 NODE NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
Nodes may be assigned a number from 0 to 32. Number 0
(the default) means that the node does not participate in
any network activity. Any assignment from 1 to 32 means
that the node actively participates in all pre-configured net-
work activity.

76-100016-001 J-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

J-2.1.3 NETWORK GROUP NUMBER work group 0, it can be silenced from any node on the net-
ASSIGNMENT work.
Nodes may be assigned to groups 0 through 32. A node J-2.1.6 EVENT LOGGING ENABLE/DISABLE
assigned to network group 0 receives and processes mes-
Enabling “Log All Events” causes all network events to be
sages received from all nodes only if configured to “Log All
logged at this node. This includes the receipt of an AC-
Events." A node assigned to groups 1 through 32 will pro-
KNOWLEDGE from a button on a remote node. Disabling
cess only those messages from nodes in the same net-
will result in logging events only in it’s own (non-zero) group.
work group unless configured to “Log All (Network) groups."
J-2.1.7 TIME RESYNCHRONIZATION PERIOD
J-2.1.4 RESET ENABLE/DISABLE
(SET IN MINUTES)
Enabling RESET on a node means that it can be reset
A time-resynchronization message is broadcast on the net-
from any other node in its group. If it is assigned to net-
work at intervals determined by the resynch period. If a node
work group 0, it can be reset from any node on the net-
does not receive a resynchronization message during this
work.
interval, it uses its network connection to ask for the time, or
J-2.1.5 SILENCE ENABLE/DISABLE uses its own locally stored time if its query does not result in
a resynch message.
Enabling SILENCE on a node means that it can be silenced
from any other node in its group. If it is assigned to net-

3. SET

1. TIME:DATE

2. PRINTER

3. DEVICES

4. PROGRAMMING

7. CLEAR EVENTS

7. NETWORK
8.RESYNCH NETWORK CLEARS ALL EVENTS INITIATED FROM REMOTE NODES
AND REQUESTS A RETRANSMISSION OF ALL EXISTING
EVENTS FROM ALL NODES

1. STYLE CH1: ENABLE/DISABLE CH2: ENABLE/DISABLE

2. NODE NUMBER NODE NUMBER ( 1 TO 64) 0: STAND ALONE

GROUP NUMBER ( 1 TO 64) 0: NOT GROUPD

3. GROUP

4. ADD/RMV NODES ADD OR REMOVE NODE#__ TO NODE# __

5. RESET EVENT ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK RESET

6. SILENCE EVENTS ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK SILENCE

7. LOG EVENTS LOG ALL GROUP OR ONLY NETWORK EVENTS

8. RESYNC PERIOD SET RESYNC: 0(off) OR 1-60000 MIN

9. ISOLATE 1:ISOLATE NODE 2:DE-ISOLATE NODE

Figure J-2. Network Menu

July 2003 J-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

Table J-1. Network Configuration Table

R emo te N o d e L o catio n AC K S IL E N C E R ESET L OG E V E N T S /E OC /R T S

N o te: If a node i s i n a non-zero group, i t wi ll accept button pushes and events from remote nodes i f

All nodes i n group 0 L SE, L RE, L L

All nodes i n same group Yes SE RE Yes

All nodes i n di fferent groups L SE, L RE, L L

N o te: If a node i s i n group 0, i t wi ll accept button pushes and events from remote nodes i f confi gured
as shown below:

All nodes i n all groups L SE, L RE, L L

L: If node i s confi gured to "Log All Groups."

SE: If node i s confi gured for remote SILENCE Enable.
RE: If node i s confi gured for remote RESET Enable

J-2.1.8 CENTRAL STATION OPERATION
A node can be configured as a central station if that node is
properly connected to a Silent Knight DACT, Model 5104.
Central Station configuration automatically forces that node
to ‘Log All Events’ and also MP04, a volt-free relay on the
CCM, is configured to activate on any alarm on any node
in the network.
J-2.2 Configuring Networking Options
via the Display/Keypad
Configuration can be performed through the system menus
which are accessible using the panel’s built-in membrane
keypad and the LCD display panel. The software will ini-
tially use default values, with networking style set to “None”
until changed by the operator.
J-2.2 PEGAsys Panel Network Menus
The menu structure of the PEGAsys has been upgraded
to accommodate network configuration. All of the network
options listed in Paragraph J-2.1 are configured via the
front panel membrane keypad. In addition, the menu pro-
vides the ability to add or remove individual or groups of
nodes to/from the network. The additions to the PEGAsys
menu structure are diagramed in Figure J-2.
J-2.3 Configuring Networking Options via PCS
Configuration of all CCM parameters, including network
parameters, can be accomplished using PCS. The soft-
ware will initially use default values, with networking Style
set to “None” until changed by an operator.
See the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program
manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015) for details.
J-2.4 Configuring Networking Options
via a “Dumb Terminal”
Network configuration can be performed through use of
the system menus using a “dumb terminal” attached to
the serial “PC Port.” The software will initially use default
values, with networking style set to “None” until changed
by an operator.
Note: Menus cannot be accessed with an alarm condi-
tion in effect.
J-3 OPERATION
Networked PEGAsys panels may be configured to com-
municate differently depending on:
• Whether they are assigned to network group 0 or to
groups 1 through 32.
• Whether they are communicating with other panels in
their local group, or with panels in a remote group.
Table J-1 summarizes these relationships. In more detail:
• A node which receives the network message from an-
other node in the same non-zero group will process
the network message appropriately, depending on its
own installed program. The ACKNOWLEDGE func-
tion will be automatic, the SILENCE and RESET func-
tions must be enabled in PEGAsys Configuration
Software (PCS), or by using the panel’s membrane
keypad and LCD display panel.
• A node in a different non-zero network group config-
ured to log all events will process network message(s)
from any node in the entire network, depending on its
own installed program. ACKNOWLEDGE is automatic,
however SILENCE and RESET functions must be en-
abled in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS), or by
using the panel’s membrane keypad and LCD display
panel.
• A node in network group zero, the default group, will
not be recognized by any other nodes in network group
zero for functions other than receiving messages un-
less it is configured to log all events in PEGAsys
Configuration Software (PCS).

76-100016-001 J-3 July 2003

PEGAsys™

Refer to Table J-1 for a summary of these relationships. although somewhat more slowly than if both channels are
• Nodes can be added or deleted from network only via in operation.
Network Menu. J-4.2.2 MESSAGING
When a node wishes to transmit over a network channel,
J-4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION the data is written to the NIC which sends the signals out
This paragraph describes the hardware used to implement to the bus for receipt by remote NICs. While a node is not
the PEGAsys Network: transmitting data, the NIC reads the bus data traffic, and
converts it to a form readable by the node’s software. Data
• Central Control Module (CCM) CPU Board
communication will be configured on the NIC’s UART as 8
• Network Interface Card (NIC) bits, no parity, 1 stop bit (8-N-1) and 9600 baud. The NIC
will either transmit locally-produced data or receive and
• Network Wiring
retransmit bus activity as a repeater.
J-4.1 Central Control Module CPU Board
J-4.2.3 REPEATER (TRANSCEIVER)
The CCM board is a slightly modified version of the origi-
The NIC acts as a repeater, regenerating bus information
nal CPU board designed so that the NIC will plug in as a
as it moves through the NIC. Its bidirectional repeater func-
daughter board. This modification has no effect on normal
tion is implemented completely in hardware; no software
operation of the PEGAsys panel or system.
is needed to control this process. The transceiver’s trans-
J-4.2 Network Interface Card (NIC) mit and receive switching (in half-duplex mode) is also per-
formed automatically by hardware.
The NIC contains the hardware necessary for data-com-
munication between network nodes. The network commu- J-4.2.4 FAIL SAFE
nication channels are EIA-485 bus lines. Each node uses
If a power failure occurs in a node, the NIC includes a
one (1) NIC. The NIC performs the following functions:
normally closed (NC) relay which maintains the communi-
• Dual-Channel Support cations integrity of the network. When the NIC loses power,
the relay passes the network signals directly through the
• Messaging
board. While the node without power will not participate in
• Repeater networking, this pass-through function allows all other net-
work nodes to function normally while providing the proper
• Fail Safe
trouble indications.
• Isolation
J-4.2.5 ISOLATION
One half of each channel is an isolated, floating RS-485
transceiver and the other half is a non-isolated, grounded
RS-485 transceiver. This assures that the chassis of any
ISOLATED
NETWORK MEDIUM NON-ISOLATED
two nodes are physically disconnected, eliminating the
TA1 Hardware
Repeater
TA2
NETWORK MEDIUM
possibility of ground-loop current, while retaining the abil-
TB1 Logic TB2
Rx/Tx Selection ity to detect ground faults.
Rx out Logic Rx out
Tx in Tx in
J-4.3 Network Wiring
Driver Driver
Enable Enable
The panels are networked by attaching two twisted,
unshielded-pair cables between the appropriate NICs. The
node-to-node wire must not exceed a length of 4000 ft.
RTS Rx Tx
and must be AWG 18 or heavier gauge. Under adverse
1/2 NETWORK INTERFACE
conditions (for example, high electrical noise) unshielded,
CARD (NIC)
twisted pairs in conduit may be required. Connect panels
To CCM CPU together as shown in Figure J-4.
Figure J-3. NIC Block Diagram
(Shown with Power to NIC Lost)
J-4.2.1 DUAL CHANNEL SUPPORT
The NIC supports operation of Style 4 or Style 7 channels.
Under normal operation with Style 7, network communica-
tion is divided between the two channels. In case of a short
circuit or a break in any of the connecting wires, either
channel by itself can execute all network communications,

July 2003 J-4 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

Channel 2
J-7.1 NIC Installation
Note B Channel 1
! CAUTION

Note A
PEGAsys system installation applications
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1 B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1 require that when a NIC is installed, pre-
discharge and release-state activation, as well
as abort-state activation are limited to the
originating fire-alarm control panel.
NETWORK NETWORK
INTERFACE
CARD
INTERFACE
CARD Note: Determine whether you have a newer or older
CCM; a new CCM can be recognized by a single-
line 20 pin header on the top edge on right side of
CCM CPU BOARD CCM CPU BOARD board. If the networking upgrade is for an older
PEGAsys PANEL PEGAsys PANEL
Note A: Attach the shields on the 'N' side of the network line to the grounding screw on the CCM.
system, the new CCM and Network Interface Card
Note B: The shields on the 'I' side of the network line are to be cut short and left floating. (NIC) will be separate. First replace the old CCM
Figure J-4. Network Wiring with the new CCM and then install the NIC. See
following instructions for NIC installation.
J-5 MAINTENANCE AND/OR REPLACEMENT
! CAUTION
No maintenance is required. In the event of failure, the mod- Many electronic components are subject to
ule should be returned to the factory for repair or replace- damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD).
ment. These components are not to be removed from
their protective wrappings until they are to be
J-6 PARTS LIST installed in their respective equipment
The NIC Installation Kit (P/N 76-100036-500) consists of locations, and then only by personnel
the following: connected to earth ground.
Note: For proper network configuration it is necessary
D escrip tio n P art N u mb er to use Version 7.X (or later) of PCS. For complete
information on this aspect of installation, see the
Network Interface Card (NIC) 74-200036-500 PEGAsys Configuration Software user's manuals
Snap-in Nylon Standoff, ¾-in. 06-118142-001 (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015). As of this date, Ver-
sion 8.X (or later) of PCS is required for proper con-
8-32 Theadless Brass Standoff, figuration.
06-118143-001
Nickel plated
J-7.2 Required Tools
8-32 x 1¼-in.
06-250116-030 Some or all of the following tools will be required to perform
Screw with Washer
removal and installation.
Installation Sheet 06-235848-001 • Small flat-blade screwdriver.
• 6" flat-blade screwdriver.
J-7 INSTALLATION • No. 2 cross-head screwdriver.
The NIC is installed as a daughter board to the CCM board. • Wire striper.
After this is accomplished, the panels are wired together • Small needle nose pliers.
using twisted, unshielded-pair cable, AWG-18 or heavier.
• Ground strap (wrist strap) for ESD protection.
For full Style-7 operation, two unshielded, twisted pair cables • IC chip extraction tool.
must connect each pair of panels, as shown in Figure J-4.
J-7.3 Central Control Module
Single-channel operation (using only one twisted pair cable
between NICs) is possible and provides Style 4 operation. The PEGAsys panel will be delivered with a separate net-
With single-channel operation, an open circuit on any net- work interface card; some existing panels can be retrofit-
work wire will effectively break the network into two sepa- ted with a network interface card. Following are instructions
rate peer-to-peer networks, both functional and both both for replacement of complete CCM modules, and for
reporting troubles. installing a NIC in an existing CCM module. The CCM
module consists of both the CPU panel and its attached
LCD display and keypad assembly.

76-100016-001 J-5 July 2003

PEGAsys™

J-7.4 Removing and Replacing a Complete CCM 10. Carefully plug in the membrane keypad and attach the
Module four screws. Make sure pins and receptacle are prop-
erly aligned.
The old CCM module can be removed as a whole and re-
placed with a new module. The following provides the pro- 11. Attach network wiring as previously described.
cedure for removing and replacing a complete CCM module. 12. Apply power, reinstall programming and configure the
1. Ensure that all programming is saved using PEGAsys network using PCS. Refer to Figure J-2.
Configuration Software (PCS). For the proper proce- 20-PIN RECEPTACLE
FOR NIC
dure, see the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS)
manuals (P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015).
2. Ensure that the power supply EPROM is of a version
compatible with PEGAsys networking. LONG SCREW
AND SPACER
3. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap. THROUGH HERE
4. Remove power from the control unit; make sure that INSERT PLASTIC
STANDOFFS HERE
the chassis remains grounded.
5. Disconnect cables from the RS-485 port, the RX/TX port,
and the PC port. Make note of each wire and cable
connection for use during reassembly
6. Remove the remaining wiring from CCM. DISPLAY PORT
RS-485 PORT
7. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the PRINT PORT

RS-485
PORT
CCM assembly in place. RX/TX PORT
P.C. PORT
8. Remove CCM assembly from cabinet.

RX/TX
PORT
9. Remove new CCM assembly from packing and inspect
for physical damage. If undamaged, proceed to Step
10. DISP
PORT
PRINT
PORT
PC
PORT

10. Install new CCM in the reverse order of removal, mak-

ing sure that each wire and cable is properly recon- Figure J-5. CCM Board Showing
nected. NIC Attachment Points
11. Apply power, reinstall programming and configure the J-7.6 Replacing Firmware Chips
network using PCS. Refer to Figure J-2.
Refer to the instructions in the applicable PEGAsys Firm-
J-7.5 Installing an NIC in an existing CCM Module ware Upgrade Kit. All networked control units must have
1. Ensure that all programming is saved using PCS soft- the same version of CCM Firmware.
ware.
2. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap. J-8 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
3. Remove power from panel but be sure the chassis The NIC is powered by the panel to which it is attached via
remains grounded. the CCM board. No other power connections are required.
4. Remove four nylon screws holding membrane keypad
and remove membrane by pulling it straight out of its J-9 TESTING
connector.
Testing is a function of the PEGAsys system in which the
5. Remove the six threaded spacers that secure the dis-
NIC is installed. No local test functions exist. For more
play electronics board and lift board out. Do not dis-
information on testing the NIC and the network, see the
connect board—let it hang down. Data and power lines
PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) User's Manual.
will remain connected.
6. Insert the three plastic standoffs that were included
with the NIC into the holes shown in Figure J-5. J-10 SPECIFICATIONS
7. Carefully plug the NIC into the 20-pin receptacle and Input Voltage 24 Vdc
onto the plastic standoffs. Supervisory Current 50 mA maximum
8. Secure upper right corner of NIC with long screw and
spacer. Spacer will separate NIC and the CCM board Alarm Current 50 mA maximum
and screw will go through to the panel.
9. Replace the display electronics board and reattach the
six threaded spacers.

July 2003 J-6 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX K
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE

Addressing and registration into the PEGAsys system is

K-1 INTRODUCTION described in Paragraph 2-8 (and sub-paragraphs) of this
The SmartOne® Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) manual. Registration of the module at the PEGAsys panel
is an intelligent field device that contains its own micropro- is mandatory to ensure proper operation.
cessor, 4K of memory and all necessary electronics to pro-
vide standard notification or audio output. Connection is via K-3 OPERATION
the SmartOne compatible control panel’s power/communi-
Once installed and configured, the ASM requires little or no
cation line. This component is a UL Listed field device.
maintenance. The module's 24 Vdc or 25/70 Vac modes
The ASM can be individually field programmed via hardware can be changed from the factory defaults using switch S1
to support notification appliances and NFPA Class B, Style and jumper P1 (see Figure K-1).
Y or Class A, Style Z operation. See Figure K-2 for audio/
auxiliary notification appliance switch and jumper selec- K-4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
tions, and NFPA operation Class A and Class B terminal
selections. The SmartOne Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM)
provides a fully supervised remote-output circuit for con-
Note: The ASM is not intended to be used as a releasing nection to either 24 Vdc audible/visual notification signal-
device and is not compatible with solenoids. ing devices or 25/70.7 V RMS speakers. The module
For installation details and complete electrical and mechani- provides continuous internal supervision of:
cal specifications, see the ASM Installation Data Sheet • Alarm contact position.
(P/N 06-235717-001).
• Connections to loop voltage and communications.
AUXILIARY KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MODE ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A. • Internal power supply.
P1=2&3 CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
S1=1&2 ON INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001 • Auxiliary power supply connections and status.
A B A B PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITED
ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED
PC LINE • Memory status.
TM
DEVICE The output circuit is monitored by reverse polarity and will
AUX./AUDIO MODE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _
SETTINGS not actuate into a short. If the circuit has a ground fault,
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM) open, short or a relay contact failure, the device will trans-
AUX. IN TROUBLE OUTPUT CKT. mit a specific trouble status.
+ - + - CKT. + - - + UL R

AUDIO
MODE
P1=1&2
S1=3 ON
Figure K-1. ASM Front Panel
K-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTRATION
As with any SmartOne loop device, addressing is done via
the Kidde hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) or
the PEGAsys control panel menu/keypad, as described in
Chapter 2 of this manual. Set the ASM for audio mode,
install a 47K Ω resistor on the output circuit, and install a
4.7K Ω resistor on the trouble circuit when addressing with
the handheld programmer.
Module-programmable parameters include owner’s-location
message, non-silenceable (waterflow), walk test, drill mode
and silence. The programming process is described in
PEGAsys™ Configuration Software (PCS) manuals
(P/Ns 76-014 and 76-015).
A status LED is mounted on the unit and indicates the out-
FM put circuit status by a two second (active) or nine second
APPROVED
(normal) flash interval. A trouble condition inhibits the sta-
tus LED completely.
K-5 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT
The ASM is shipped from the factory as an assembled
component, and is not field serviceable. Little or no main-
tenance is required.
Testing is accomplished through the testing capabilities of
the PEGAsys panel. See Chapter 5, Troubleshooting and
Corrective Maintenance, for particulars. In the event of a
failure, the module should be replaced.
For replacement, follow the instructions in the ASM Instal-
lation data sheet.

76-100016-001 K-1 January 2002

PEGAsys™

If the auxiliary notification appliance power source is not

K-6 PARTS LIST power limited, the output circuit, auxiliary input circuit and
The following parts are required for installation and opera- the trouble circuit are non-power limited. Otherwise, all
tion. All are supplied with the ASM. three circuits are power limited.

• Addressable Signal/Sounder Module: Supervision of audio to ASM must be provided by the au-
P/N 70-200200-001 dio equipment. Power limited or non-power limited ampli-
fier outputs are available.
• Front Cover Plate:
P/N 06235714-001 K-7.2 Output Circuit Characteristics
• End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 4.7 K Ohms, 1/2 W: Output Circuit Rating
P/N 06-250166-452
2.0 A max. @ 30.0 Vdc
• End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 47 K Ohms, 1/2 W:
P/N 06-250166-596 20.0 W @ 70.7 V RMS
• Installation Data Sheet: P/N 06-235717-001 20.0 W @ 25.0 V RMS
Maximum Line Resistances
K-7 INSTALLATION
(with 12 AWG wire)
Refer to Figure K-2 and to the ASM Installation Instruction
Data Sheet. L o ad R esistan ce L e n g th
(a m p s ) (o h m s ) (fe e t)*
K-7.1 Installation Notes
The ASM single printed circuit board is intended for indoor 0.22 20.0 12.0k
use and can be mounted in a North American 4-11/16" 0.55 8.0 5.0k
electrical box, or 4-inch square 2-1/8-inch deep box. The
module terminal block will accept #12, #14, #16 and #18 1.00 4.0 2.5k
AWG wire (4.0 mm2, 2.5 mm2, 1.5 mm2 and 1.0 mm2 re- 1.50 2.7 0.6k
spectively). Size #18 AWG is the minimum requirement.
The use of solid wire and an extension ring is recom- 2.00 2.0 1.2k
mended.
*Note: Consider total line lengths from module to field and
Strip ¼-inch from the ends of all wires that connect to the return.
terminal block of the module.

! CAUTION
Exposing more than ¼-inch of wire may cause
a ground fault. Exposing less than ¼-inch of
wire may result in a faulty connection.

1/4“ (6.4mm) NTS

Figure K-2. ¼-Inch Strip

Refer to the National Electrical Code for proper box specifi-
cations. ASM volume is 8.94 cubic-inches.
Refer to the RX/TX specifications in the chapters on Opera-
tion and Functional Description for addressable-loop wiring
specifications.
Power/Communication (PC) line wiring is power limited and
supervised. For power-limited circuits, use Type FPL, FPLR
or FPLP cable per Article 760 of the National Electrical
Code (NEC).
The note located on the module's product label (ALL OTH-
ERS-POWER LIMITED) must be removed if the module is
connected to a non-power limited supply source.

January 2002 K-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

PC LINE PC LINE
IN OUT
SEE NOTE 3
FOR 24VDC MODE
SET P1 JUMPER KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
FROM 2-3 ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
AND SWITCH S1 CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
1 2 3 A B A B PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LMTD.
ON ON OFF PC LINE ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED

FOR AUDIO MODE

DEVICE
SET P1 JUMPER
AUX./AUDIO MODE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _
FROM 1-2 SETTINGS
AND SWITCH S1 LISTED COMPATIBLE
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE
1 2 3 24VDC OR 25/70.7VAC
AUX. IN TROUBLE OUTPUT CKT.
OFF OFF ON NOTIFICATION
+ - + - CKT. + - - +
VERIFY SWITCH AND APPLIANCES
JUMPER SETTINGS
AND TEST PER
NFPA 72
SUPPLY LISTED
SEE OUT 47K, 1/2W EOL +
NOTE 6 RESISTOR -

EXAMPLE OF STYLE Z
TROUBLE CONTACT
(CLASS A) SHOWING THE
OPEN FOR ONLY ALLOWABLE EOL
NORMAL STATUS RESISTOR POSITION.

+ - LISTED
REGULATED SUPPLY OR 4.7K, 1/2W
25/70.7 VAC AUDIO EOL RESISTOR
AMPLIFIER LISTED FOR
FIRE PROTECTIVE
SIGNALING SYSTEMS

OUTPUT CKT.
LISTED
+ - - + - - 47K, 1/2W
SEE NOTE 4 + + EOL
RESISTOR

EXAMPLE OF STYLE Y
(CLASS B) SHOWING THE
ONLY ALLOWABLE EOL
RESISTOR POSITION.

NOTES:
1. Terminal connection supports wiring from #18 AWG (1.0 mm2) to #12 AWG (4.0 mm2). Wires determine electrical box
depth.
2. Refer to Control Panel Manual for addressable loop wiring specification.
3. PC Line wiring is power limited and supervised.
4. If auxiliary power source is non-power limited, the output circuit, auxiliary input circuit and the trouble circuit are non-
power limited. Otherwise, all three circuits are power limited.
5. All circuits are supervised.
6. Supervision of audio to ASM must be provided by the audio equipment.

Figure K-3. Installation Wiring Diagram

76-100016-001 K-3 January 2002

PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

January 2002 K-4 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX L
REMOTE DISPLAY CONTROL MODULE
AND REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE

L-1 INTRODUCTION L-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This manual contains the information necessary to support
the PEGAsys Remote Display Control Module (RDCM)
(Figure L-1), P/N 76-300000-502, and Remote Display Mod-
ule (RDM) (Figure L-2), P/N 76-300000-501. Both modules
function as remote addressable adjuncts to the PEGAsys
and mimic the main control panel’s LCD and LED front dis-
plays. Additionally, the RDCM contains system control
switches and a tactile response numeric keypad. These con-
trols match the PEGAsys layout. The RDM does not permit
operation of the control features (operation is “read only”).
The RDCM is key and password secured with the password
needed being the one used on the associated PEGAsys panel.
System Status Display
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
ACKNOWLEDGE
ALARM SUPERVISORY
PRE-ALARM SILENCE
1 2
The RDCM and RDM communicate with the PEGAsys via
an RS-485 interface (one pair #18 AWG, twisted/unshielded
wire) in a multi-drop configuration capable of supporting
up to fifteen (15) RDCM display/control and sixteen (16)
RDM display only modules. The installation can be in any
combination of RDCM/RDM modules so long as the maxi-
mum quantity for each module is not exceeded. The
RDCM, in addition to emulation of the PEGAsys LEDs and
LCD display, provides remote access to the system and, if
programmed, the PEGAsys network panel(s) and menu op-
tions via this emulation of the PEGAsys front panel func-
tion and numeric keys.
Remote, non-resetable power is required and can be pro-
vided by the control panel PSU or a separate UL Listed
supply for fire alarm application. In each instance, remote
power is supervised by the RDCM and RDM with failure
SYSTEM
SILENCE displayed locally and at the control panel. The units also
SYSTEM
SCROLL
contain a buzzer with sequencing that follows the buzzer
RESET
contained in the control panel.
3 4 5

R 6 7 8 9 0
Either the PEGAsys control panel or one RDCM can be
programmed as the master unit to control the system un-
der alarm or fault conditions. Operation of an alternate (non-
master) unit will grant that module exclusive control over
Figure L-1. RDCM Front Panel the system for 30 seconds. Under these conditions, at-
tempts to input from another module will prompt a lockout
display message on the module attempting the interrupt.
This acts to prevent conflicting inputs. Under all circum-
System Status Display
stances, the master will be granted immediate system con-
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
trol.
ALARM SUPERVISORY

PRE-ALARM SILENCE
SCROLL L-2.1 Operator Interface
All operator interfaces are contained in the front panel as-
R sembly. Operator inputs are passed to the PEGAsys for
processing.
The RDCM operator-interface function keys are:
Figure L-2. RDM Front Panel
• Acknowledge: Acknowledge alarms/troubles and
Module installers must be fully factory trained in all as- silence all local buzzers.
pects of the PEGAsys system. Additional supporting docu-
mentation is also contained in this manual and in the • Silence: Silence signal/audibles after Acknowl-
PEGAsys™ Configuration Software (PCS) manuals, P/Ns edge.
76-014 and 76-015. • Reset: Reset latched alarm conditions.
• Scroll: Review active alarms/troubles.
Note: Drill operation is available through the PEGAsys
menu.

76-100016-001 L-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

The RDCM operator interface needed to enter the pass- L-2.2 Interconnection
word and access the PEGAsys menu is provided via the
The RDCM and RDM operate on a shared RS-485 bus which
alphanumeric keypad:
supports wire runs of up to 4000 ft. from the PEGAsys con-
• 0–9: Used to enter digits to access PEGAsys trol panel. The primary RS-485 bus from the PEGAsys will
menus. support up to fifteen (15) RDCMs and sixteen (16) RDMs in
any combination not exceeding the maximum for each
• Backspace: Used to exit menu and correct entries.
module.
• Enter: Used when selecting from PEGAsys menus.
L-2.3 Addressing
Note: Operation of above keys will be hereinafter de-
Address selection is via setting of the 16-way, 4-bit hexa-
scribed.
decimal coded rotary switch, SW1, mounted on the printed
The RDCM and RDM operator interface status LEDs for circuit board. See Figure L-4.
monitoring the PEGAsys and remote modules are:
Table L-1. Address Switch Settings
• Alarm: Indicates an alarm condition.
S w itch R D M/R D C M S w itch R D M/R D C M
• Trouble: Indicates a trouble condition. S ettin g Ad d ress S ettin g A d d re s s
• Silence: Indicates PEGAsys signal/audibles have
1 RDM or RDCM 01 9 RDM or RDCM 09
been silenced after Acknowledge.
2 RDM or RDCM 02 A RDM or RDCM 10
• Supervisory: Indicates a supervisory condition.
3 RDM or RDCM 03 B RDM or RDCM 11
• Power-on: Indicates the system is receiving AC
power. 4 RDM or RDCM 04 C RDM or RDCM 12
• Pre-alarm: Indicates a smoke or thermal detector 5 RDM or RDCM 05 D RDM or RDCM 13
is in pre-alarm condition.
6 RDM or RDCM 06 E RDM or RDCM 14
• CPU fail: Mounted on main PCB and available to
the installer only. Indicates RDCM/RDM proces- 7 RDM or RDCM 07 F RDM or RDCM 15
sor has failed to initialize.
8 RDM or RDCM 08 0 RDM 16
LED colors used to represent indications are:
• Red: Alarm. L-3 OPERATION
• Green: Power-on. Before proceeding with operations, become totally famil-
• Yellow: CPU failure, trouble, silence, supervisory iar with PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System
and pre-alarm. manual, especially the sections on Active Alarm Mode,
Active Supervisory Mode and Active Trouble Mode. Be sure
The RDM functions as read only. Therefore, it has a scroll to note differences between latching and non-latching Ac-
key, but does not provide the other function keys nor an tive Alarm Modes.
operable keypad.
For RX/TX loop input devices: To set either latching or
non-latching, refer to the PCS Operations chapter in the
PEGAsys Configuration Software manual.

PEGAsys TWISTED UNSHIELDED CABLE

PINS 3 & 4 ARE

+ 1 TIED TOGETHER WHEN 5 UP TO 31
AUX. RDCM/RDM AUX. SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY - 2 USING THE PANELS 6 REMOTE
24V ASSEMBLY RDCM/RDM DEVICES (IF REQ'D.)
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY +
5 7 3 7 1 - 24V
TB1
DCM ASSEMBLY 6 8 IN OUT 4 8 IN 2
PINS 6 5 3 4 TO TROUBLE
CONTACTS
TB1 PINS TB1 PINS TB1 PINS CLOSED = NORMAL
OPERATION
PIN 1 OF TB1 IS AT TOP OF CONNECTOR

NOTES:
1. ALL CIRCUITS ARE SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED.
2. REMOVE JUMPER W2 FROM DCM AND ALL INTERMEDIATE REMOTE DISPLAYS. INSTALL W2 ON LAST REMOTE DISPLAY ONLY.
3. IF SHIELDED CABLE, CONNECT SHIELD TO CHASSIS/EARTH GROUND.

Figure L-3. Interconnection of PEGAsys Panel, RDM, RDCM(s)

July 2003 L-2 76-100016-001


The following example is for latching alarm mode (for these
examples, assume the device to be manual release, ad-
dress 1004).
In Normal Standby Mode, the display will show:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 06-08-99
PEGASYS
In practice, the actual local time and date will be shown.
When a RX/TX loop device goes into active alarm, the
display will show:
1004 ALARM ON - MANUAL RELEASE
Default or user text
L-3.1 Switch Functions
The switch functions are listed in sequence of use:
L-3.1.1 ACKNOWLEDGE
All ALARM ON, ALARM OFF, TROUBLE ON/OFF or SU-
PERVISORY ON/OFF messages must be acknowledged
by operation of this switch. Multiple alarms must be indi-
vidually acknowledged, all other multiple inputs will default
to individual acknowledge, but may be programmed to glo-
bal acknowledge by accessing the “SET" menu from the
PEGAsys or any RDCM.
The RDCM will pass the acknowledge input to the
PEGAsys causing its LED to go from a pulsing to a steady
mode, and the buzzer to silence.
The PEGAsys sends a global command to silence all re-
mote RDCM/RDM buzzers.
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all
other RDCMs. This gives the calling device exclusive con-
trol over the system for 30 seconds. Under these condi-
tions, attempts to input from another module will prompt a
lockout display message (see Paragraph L-3.1.2) on the
module attempting the interrupt to prevent conflicting in-
puts. Under all circumstances, the module (or control panel)
programmed as the system master will be granted imme-
diate system control.
The display at the calling device will then show:
1004 ALARM ON ACK - MANUAL RELEASE
Default or user text
(The default or user text is that which is entered at the
associated PEGAsys panel. This message cannot be
changed from the RDCM.)
The display will then show how many active alarms are
still present in the system (if any), and subsequently dis-
play how many active supervisory or trouble conditions are
still present in the system (if any). For example:
001
ACTIVE ALARMS REMAINING
76-100016-001
PEGAsys™
Again, in the case of multiple alarms (either On or Off),
each event must be acknowledged separately. In the case
of multiple troubles, actuation of the acknowledge input
may be separate or programmed to global acknowledge.
A maximum of thirty (30) trouble messages can be acknowl-
edged at any one time.
For non-latching sequence, each ALARM OFF will display
and must be acknowledged.
1004 ALARM OFF - MANUAL RELEASE
Default or user text
In the event of loss of communications between the RDCM
and the PEGAsys on the RS-485 bus, the local buzzer will
sound and the trouble LED will light.
L-3.1.2 SILENCE
When all alarm and trouble conditions have been acknowl-
edged, operation of the “silence” switch will have the fol-
lowing results:
• The RDCM will pass the silence input to the
PEGAsys causing all outputs programmed for si-
lence to de-energize.
• The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout com-
mand to all other RDCM(s). This gives the calling
device exclusive control over the system for 30
seconds. For these examples, assume RDCM
address 02. If another (non-master) module at-
tempts an interrupt, the following lockout message
will display for 5 seconds:
RDCM 02
IN CONTROL
Note: RDCM 02 is the default. This message can be cus-
tomized in PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Con-
figuration Software manual.
After the 30 second control period, any other module can
provide system inputs (unless a module programmed as
system master assumes control).
L-3.1.3 RESET
After all active alarms and troubles have been cleared,
input devices programmed to the latching sequence will
show:
XXX
ALARMS ACTIVE
Input devices programmed to the non-latching sequence
will show:
NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINS
Operation of the “reset” switch will have the following re-
sults:
• The RDCM will pass the reset input to the
PEGAsys, causing all conditions programmed to
cancel on reset to de-energize.
L-3 July 2003
PEGAsys™

• The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout com- If the password entry is incorrect, the display will become:
mand to all other RDCMs. This gives the calling
PASSWORD ENTRY FAILED
device exclusive control over the system for 30
seconds and displays the following message: The RDCM will request another password entry request,
and, if correct, the PEGAsys will send the 30 second glo-
SYSTEM RESET
bal lockout command to all other RDCMs.
If there are no further key entries at the calling
The calling device (address 02) will then have access to
device (address 02), and no further system events
the PEGAsys menu. Please refer to this manual for menu
are detected, all modules and the PEGAsys will
operating instructions.
display the system default message:
If during the password entry sequence any key other than
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 03-08-99
the numeric key (except “Backspace”) is pressed before
PEGASYS
the “Enter” key, the PEGAsys will update the RDCM with
In practice, the actual local time and date will be the default display.
shown.
L-3.2 LED Status Display
In the event of an RDCM's microprocessor going
The front panel display LEDs will operate in three modes:
into fault condition, actuation of hardware switch
S3 located behind the display membrane will cause • Off: No system activity.
a hardware reset of the microprocessor.
• On Continuously: Acknowledged alarm, supervisory
L-3.1.4 SCROLL or trouble.
When the “Scroll” key is pressed during any active system • Pulsing: 1 second on, 1 second off; active alarm,
event, the following will result: supervisory or trouble.
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all L-3.3 LCD Display
other RDCM(s). Calling device (address 02) will then have
With no active events in the system, all RDCM/RDMs will
exclusive control over the system as described in “reset”
display the default message:
above.
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00am 03-08-99
Note: The RDM scroll key does not provide the global
PEGASYS
lockout command.
“PEGASYS” is the default message. This can be custom-
The PEGAsys, RDCMs and RDMs will then be updated by
ized by PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration
the next event in the buffer.
Software manual.
When a “Scroll” key is actuated at any RDCM, RDM or the
L-3.4 Password Data Structure
PEGAsys, the resulting scroll display is sent globally to
the system. Two system levels are available from the RDCM. These
are: Level 1 (User Level) and Level 2 (Installer Level). Refer
• LED Test Feature: With no active inputs, press and
to the “Menu Function” and “Menu Structure” sections of
hold the “scroll” key for 2 seconds. All LEDs will light
the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System
for 5 seconds.
manual for descriptions of the capabilities available through
• System Information Entry Keys: To enter passwords these levels.
and gain access the PEGAsys menu functions, the
relevant keys are: Each PEGAsys is shipped from the factory with default
passwords for Level 1 of 987 and Level 2 of 1865. Default
• Numeric 0-9: Enters password and system func-
passwords can be customized in the Level 2 “Set Menu
tion information.
Function”. Changing passwords for the system can be ac-
• Enter: Enter information into the system menu. complished from any RDCM or directly from the PEGAsys.
• Backspace: Exit system menu or correct wrong L-3.5 RDCM/RDM Local Trouble Conditions
entries.
The RDCM/RDM is supervised for failure of the power sup-
To enter the password, press the “0” key. The RDCM opens ply and failure to communicate with the PEGAsys during
the password entry menu and displays: the polling routine. The power failure display is:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
Each key entry will then display the “#” character:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
####

July 2003 L-4 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

REMOTE PSU FAULT “ON”

RDCM XX
If no communication is detected with the PEGAsys during
the polling routine and the PSU is active, a local trouble
message will be displayed on the RDCM/RDM.
NO COMMUNICATION WITH MAIN PANEL

L-4 SPECIFICATIONS
Table L-1. RDCM/RDM Specifications

E L E C T R IC AL

In p u t vo ltag e 24 Vdc nomi nal

S u p erviso ry cu rren t 64 mA nomi nal

Alarm cu rren t 85 mA nomi nal

R S -485 n etw o rk Up to 4000 ft. from PEGAsys

control panel usi ng #18 AWG
twi sted/unshelded wi re

Maximu m R D C M/R D Ms 15 RDCMs/16 RDMs i n any

combi nati on, not exceedi ng
maxi mum for each module

Wirin g style NFPA Style 4, Class "B"

ME C H AN IC AL

D imen sio n s 12.05" W X 7.156" H

Weig h t 4 lbs, 13 oz

E N V IR ON ME N TAL

Op eratin g temp eratu re 32oF (0oC)–120oF (49oC)

Op eratin g h u mid ity 85% non-condensi ng

L-5 INSTALLATION
See Figure L-4.

76-100016-001 L-5 July 2003

PEGAsys™

.409

MOUNTING FOR #10

(.190 DIA.) SCREWS

12.000
5.875
9.500

SW1 ADDRESS 1 TO 16 (F)

1.250
W1 LED BACKLIGHT ENABLE
1/2" & 3/4" VR1 LED BACKLIGHT ADJUST
COMBINATION KNOCKOUTS
(2) LOCATED ON TOP SURFACE VR2 LCD CONTRAST ADJUST
(1) LOCATED ON EACH SIDE.

.
DS1
ND
OU
RT
H
GR SW3
IS/EA
ASS
CH
O
ET

D ED
CA
BL
HARDWARE FOR
IEL

ISTE
D
SH
GND. CONNECTION
R
SU
P PL
Y TW
CONNECTOR
WE
PO FM VED
O
PR
UL AP
R

INSTRUCTION LABEL
.
NO
R.
SE

Figure L-4. Installation of RDM or RDCM

July 2003 L-6 76-100016-001


APPENDIX M
ADDRESSABLE ALARMLINE™ MODULE
M-1 INTRODUCTION
The Addressable AlarmLineTM Module (AAM) permits an
AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the
PEGAsys control panel. This interface will allow for pre-alarm,
alarm and trouble conditions to be transmitted to the control
panel via the RX/TX (Receive/Transmit) loop. The AAM moni-
tors the resistance of the sensor cable and generates a pre-
alarm (if enabled), alarm or overheat output (if enabled) when
the resistance drops below the programmed threshold. The
module also supervises the AlarmLine cable for opens and
shorts, which will generate a fault condition. All of the pre-
alarm, alarm, overheat and trouble conditions will be displayed
on the Central Control Module (CCM) of the PEGAsys panel.
Up to 255 AAM modules can be connected to a single RX/TX
module. The use of multiple AAMs allows for flexibility in zon-
ing larger installations for location of alarm and zone output
control; the control panel acts as a central display and control
interface.
For complete information, please refer to the AlarmLine
Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation
and Maintenance Manual (P/N 73.04).
TM
Figure M-1. Addressable AlarmLine™ Module Front
Panel
M-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTERING
Each AAM is shipped from the factory with the default ad-
dress of ‘000’. This permits connection to the Power Com-
munication (PC) line without interfering with devices already
on the loop. Only one device with this default address
should be connected to the PC line at a time. Alternately,
the AAM address can be preset with a hand-held program-
mer (P/N 74-200013-001) after which the module can be
connected to the PC line. If a hand-held programmer is
not available, the address can be changed directly at the
CCM using the procedure outlined in Chapter 2 of this
manual.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys™
M-3 OPERATION
A change in temperature produces a change in resistance
between the loops within the sensor cable (as the tem-
perature increases, resistance decreases exponentially).
This change is continuously monitored by the AAM, which
generates an alarm or pre-alarm signal at a predetermined
level corresponding to the temperature set point.
The temperature at which the system will alarm is deter-
mined by selecting one of 16 configuration settings using
the control panel’s configuration software or CCM menu
options. The appropriate configuration setting for a given
set point is established by the use of a nomogram incor-
porating two known factors:
• Maximum ambient temperature of the alarm zone
• Length of the sensor cable
The integrating (averaging) effect of the sensor cable al-
lows it to detect localized hot spot or a low level tempera-
ture increase over the entire length. For more detailed
information, please refer to the AlarmLine Addressable Lin-
ear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
M-4 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT
The AAM is shipped from the factory as an assembled
component and is not field serviceable. Little or no main-
tenance is required.
Refer to Chapters 4 and 5 of this manual and to the AlarmLine
Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual for further information on maintenance
and testing of field devices connected to the PEGAsys panel
RX/TX loop.
M-5 PARTS LIST
Refer to Chapter 9 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat
Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
M-6 INSTALLATION
Refer to Paragraph 3-2 of the AlarmLine Addressable Lin-
ear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
M-1 July 2003
PEGAsys™

M-7 TESTING
Refer to Chapter 7 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat
Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.

July 2003 M-2 76-100016-001


APPENDIX N
NETWORKABLE CENTRAL CONTROL MODULE (NCCM)
N-1 INTRODUCTION
The Networkable Central Control Module (NCCM), shown
in Figure N-1, is the heart of the PEGAsys system and is
composed of two printed circuit board assemblies: the dis-
play control module (DCM) and the CCM printed circuit
board. The NCCM is available in two versions: P/N 76-
100008-501/-701 for single-loop systems and P/N 76-
100008-600/-800 for multi-loop systems.
System Status Display
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
ACKNOWLEDGE
ALARM SUPERVISORY
PRE-ALARM SILENCE
1 2
R 6 7 8
Figure N-1. Networkable Central Control Module
Front Panel
The NCCM is essentially identical to the CCM described
earlier in this manual, with the same capabilities. However,
the CCM printed circuit board has been designed to re-
ceive the optional Network Interface Card (see the physi-
cal description and menu options in Appendix J of this
manual), enabling networked operation.
Additionally, the display control module adjunct to the main
processor module provides connection to the Remote Dis-
play Control Module (RDCM) and Remote Display Module
(RDM) described in Appendix L of this manual.
N-2 CONFIGURATION/FUNCTION
The CCM PCB controls the operation and supervision of
all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys
system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX mod-
ule, and system data from the optional NIC and/or RDCM.
It processes the data based on pre-programmed instruc-
tions and transmits output commands to the output mod-
ules, optional NIC and/or RDCM or RDM modules, loop
output devices, and the adjunct display control module.
The CCM PCB contains the system CPU, real-time clock,
watchdog timer and two serial RS-232 ports: a program-
ming input/output (PC) port and a printer output port. These
ports accept 6-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. PEGAsys
76-100016-001
PEGAsys™
Configuration Software (PCS) is used to program the sys-
tem. A multi-level password scheme protects the system
from unauthorized access.
The real-time clock provides the NCCM with the ability to
display the current time and date on the system LCD and
provides basic information for real-time operations.
Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of the
system. Examples include: microprocessor failure, memory
failure, RS-232 port troubles, etc. Network diagnostics are
controlled separately and report to appropriate panels.
The two individually programmable signal output circuits
(MP1 and MP2) provided are used primarily for signaling
devices (horns, bells, strobes) and deliver up to 2.0 Amps
SYSTEM
SILENCE of 24 Vdc power. Optionally, the MP1 output can be pro-
SYSTEM
SCROLL
grammed for releasing applications using solenoid-actuated
RESET
suppression equipment (agent and sprinkler).
3 4 5
9 0
Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 and MP4)
are provided on the NCCM for controlling building functions
during alarm occurrences. Relays are Form C, 1 Amp @
30 Vdc rated.
All four NCCM outputs can be programmed via EOC to ac-
tivate from either panel or, if provided, network inputs.
One non-programmable trouble relay is supplied which is
normally powered (24 Vdc) and will transfer on any sys-
tem (or, if provided, network) trouble, supervisory, pre-alarm
and complete power-off condition. Relay is Form C, rated
1 Amp @ 30 Vdc.
Refer to Appendix I for mechanical installation details.
An event history buffer is provided on the NCCM which will
store 1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multi-
loop system events information. Network option does not
alter event limits, however, network events are recorded.
The system menu permits operator retrieval of recorded
events. The PCS program provides the ability to download,
store and print all or a portion of the event history buffer.
The NCCM common display module assembly (which is
physically and electronically attached to the main proces-
sor module) provides the system with the operator inter-
face and, if provided, network interface for control switches,
system status LEDs, system trouble/alarm buzzer, an 80
character (2 x 40) LCD display and an integral numeric
keypad. The keypad is used for entering the security pass-
word and navigating through the user menus. The system
buzzer provides two distinct signaling patterns for audible
warning of system alarms and troubles.
N-1 July 2003
PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

July 2003 N-2 76-100016-001

 PEGAsys™

APPENDIX O
CENTRAL STATION OPERATION

O-1 CENTRAL STATION OPERATION

For central station operation, the PEGAsys control panel
must be configured for central station use through PCS
menu (Network Settings). A Silent Knight DACT—Model
5104—must be wired to the PEGAsys control panel, as
shown in Figure O-1. See the Model 5104 installation
manual for information regarding connection of the DACT
to the telephone line for alarm and trouble transmission(s).

Silent Knight DACT Model 5104 PCB

NO NC C NO NC C
Volt Free Fault Relay
Relay 2

PegaSYS CCM PCB 4.7k 18

8 17
Zone 3 Alarm
9 16
10 15
4.7k
11 14
Zone 4 Trouble
12 13

Figure O-1. Wiring for DACT

76-100016-001 O-1 July 2003

PEGAsys™

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

July 2003 O-2 76-100016-001

 TECHNICAL MANUAL USER FEEDBACK FORM

(Use this report to indicate deficiencies, user remarks and recommendations relating to the publication. Fold on dotted line, tape and mail to
KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc., 400 Main Street, Ashland, MA 01721, Attn. Documentation Manager or FAX to 508-881-8920)

DATE:

1. PART NUMBER 2. VOLUME NO. 3. TITLE (NOMENCLATURE)

4. CHANGE NO. OR REV. DATE 5. SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT 6. PRIORITY OF COMMENT

7. USER EVALUATION

MANUAL IS:
EXCELLENT
GOOD
FAIR
POOR
COMPLETE
INCOMPLETE

8.
PROBLEM
QUESTION
SUGGESTION
COMMENT: (check one)

9. RECOMMENDED CHANGE TO PUBLICATION

PAGE PARAGRAPH LINE FIGURE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON

NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. (Use Blank Continuation Sheets as Required)

10. ORIGINATOR 11. COMPANY NAME

12. ADDRESS

13. KIDDE-FENWAL USE ONLY

a. Received b. Action Necessity c. Priority d. Comments

220423
FOLD

Place
Stamp
Here

KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc.
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721

Attn. Documentation Manager

FOLD

220423
 LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. represents that this product is free from defects in material and workmanship, and it will repair or replace
any product or part thereof which proves to be defective in workmanship or material for a period of twelve (12) months from
the date of purchase but not to exceed eighteen (18) months after shipment by Kidde-Fenwal Inc. For a full description of
Kidde-Fenwal’s LIMITED WARRANTY, which, among other things, EXCLUDES warranties of MERCHANTABILITY and
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE and liability for CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, please read the entire LIMITED
WARRANTY on the Kidde-Fenwal Quotation, Acceptance of Order and/or Original Invoice which will become part of your
sales agreement. Please contact Kidde-Fenwal directly for a return material authorization (RMA) number before returning
material to the factory at Ashland, Massachusetts, shipment prepaid. Kidde-Fenwal will repair or replace and ship prepaid.

AlarmLine, PEGAsys and ORION are trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.

Kidde, HSSD and SmartOne are registered trademarks of Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.

These instructions do not purport to cover all the details or variations in the equipment
described, nor do they provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection
with installation, operation and maintenance. All specifications subject to change without
notice. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which
are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred
to KIDDE-FENWAL INC., Ashland, Masssachusetts

©
76-100016-001 Rev. BD 2003 Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. Printed in USA